awe a Ww > ayy i Pr read ik FLA A TUT ) ; ¥ vv V a = ‘ Vv Pur. i ie if ind 4 vOtNNS wy Te wiles w\ | PROS COLTS vt ve re aw WV, PSUS. ; ws aay er a; yee. aeeyve os abe a a yy traced a) Me SR 11) 44e ale Cie uy bck: 4 ST el wih Vy y Se hed SUSE vy YY, Oy : ; w’ wos Tet We ey | of Jette eae BUgeserCr ene DAA IAA Oo uy SS oephi Meee Lt, wee, OT ole es N Aig ere. Ne eet PEEP EEE Rene Tew cigs ~ Ad a P > , H f wh Lat | : BG ce a wweuUF we A . ( uM Re = alles (aad ed ad dtd bas Wiehe dt ‘ PLL evignit p A : Vy we’ eS Uo, eh K : Nee 4 yt eo peli. x MU UL “ay iio’ APE dd ts ah 1 ay iéd r comet eee wee f mee sai Paha i eh PARE At bled he RHC rE idl Eee Miao fas whee te Ma A v ve *w ’ ov we sSa= ‘oon Jw .& w Ahi fr re pr . wa ibaey Rie} Bs ts as wy ey) Wo ge te »” nS SWowvsws MAE A) ~ Te eee » ; . if. he ie, eur. t Weir PVE gs" tT hed TS 1 dl we Ki ANG ir ORM = Ady 1 vi } v ret eet i 5 thea Beit TAL | | ae rll | eae see e piste ~ s 4y NW % dae ? A ASA eS wl CU ee te. Heyy bi ‘wy rec TT an Wee ye Wt, 1 Reg OH y . jew ~aleyd FF bs re Urea Hayy Vs "\ I Tvaveeyiuneveregeses Thea ale 1v : ‘ oy~ SS — NN acted Ultet oeey ‘ mw foe yes e- navvt fl vie hin Ai Om. = | 14 = ; TTA, .rce- svt wd bs Uw JS, a ad 7] S ee Sees - AAAS | SASS | a BALE | Sevy" MIATY att, well : Weep TE BR ocwenten nie eb ul LY d WN ec ~ ~wo¥" \ vv " oe i sali qv" Mm PTS Tae sett Wow Ny ty | Ot ne wn Ly ae OW, Wilt, MGs; ws | We wy ictee ty AL le : ‘wy wy WWivy ald TT te RAP Le th kM alt fet OU tal folder tet Oy ys . a hae) ee pa nev LA. a Ba Bl ns ft aH 2 TELL TRE: LUTIM TAME wu’ Hohl: Ad | be Wes wp ‘Ath: | Petty eb Peg) | See RR Era ay var yours aA Ai a vee Wae) eee van TH | yy essere ure We voqvoletivyy’ be iaseccawetl Na Athebde a ET ; wre . BA PEP Puvryrerered bi aa ie Tit \ yey a OURNAL AN D PROCEEDINGS ze. gy TEES ROYAL soci Bry NEW som WALES 1920. Vor itv. . EDITED BY ‘ THE HONORARY SHORETARIES, tay d ee i | SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY. - 1920 ‘CONTENTS. VOLUME LIV. Art. L—PReEstpENTIAL ADDRESS. By C. E: FawsitT, po Issued September 15th, 1920... 0 1... ae a Arr, IJ.—Council’s Report St en miee at As es _ ART. IIL—The Action of Cupric Chlovide on Organo-metallic - Derivatives of Magnesium. By H. E. TURNER, B. Ay) MeBe A...c. Issued September 27th,-1920. _... weate oa aga aes Arr. [V.—On the Manufacture of Thymol, SM anthors and Menthol from Eucalyptus Oils. By H.G. Smiru, ¥.¢.s., and. AL PENFOLD, F.c.s. Issued November 30th, 1920. ee aay Arr. V.—A New Species of Queensland Ironbark. “By R. I CAMBAGE, F.L.S. [With Plate J.] Issued November 15th, 1921 Art. VI.—On Aphrophyllum Hallense, gen. et sp. nov. and Lithostro tion from the neighbourhood of Bingara, N.S. Wales. > By Stan.ey SMITH, M.A., D.Sc, F.G.8. (Communicated by Prof. W. N. Benson, D.se:, F.G.s.- [With Plates II-V.] Issued November 30th, 1920... at ie via Sige a Art. VII.—Descriptions of three new species of Eucalyptus. By J. H. MArpeEn, 1.s. Os Fs8;8. teaiet November St cL Three ae Teenat Havent 15th, 1920! eae ~ Art, IX.—A Geological Reconnaissance of the Stirling Ranges « Western Australia. By W. G.-Woo.noveu, D-Be ¥.@.8. [ With Plate VI.] Issued. November 30th, 1920. -Arr..X —The Volcanic Neck at the Basin, Nepean ne G. D. OsBoRNE, B.se. (Communicated by Prof. T. W. E. DAVID, C.M.G., D.8.0., F.B.S.) ea Plate Fale a ‘ December 6th, 1920. be es se Eee ._ Arr. XI.—Acacia Seedlings, Part vL ‘By pies 3 Came F i [With Plates VIII-X.] Issued December 30th, 1920, ~ _-—s- Arr. XII.—On a Box Tree from New South Wales and -Queens- ees _dand. By J.H. MAIDEN, U8.0., F.B.8._ Issued December SOE, pe 4080 eS a a ee Art. XIIL—Notes on Eucalyptus, No. IX, wwith foo three new species. By J: H. Marien, 180s F.R.S. _ December 30th, 1920. ae ee ee 7 oe 4 JOURN AL AND PROCEEDINGS ROYAL SOCIETY NEW SOUTH WALES FOR 1920. (INCORPORATED 1881.) Wee dio hak V. EDITED BY THE HONORARY SECRETARIES. THE AUTHORS OF PAPERS ARE ALONE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE STATEMENTS MADE AND THE OPINIONS EXPRESSED THEREIN. Fao Van aS 25586; Nations} Murer” SYDNEY PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, 5 ELIZABETH STREET, SYDNEY. 1920. ART. ART, ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. CONTENTS. VOLUME LIV. I.—PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. By C. H. FAwsITtT, D.Sc., Ph.D, Issued September 15th, 1920. ... Ss sos II.—Council’s Report IlI,—The Action of Cupric Chloride on anny Dome Derivatives of Magnesium. By E. E. TuRNER, B.A., M.8c., A.1.c. Issued September 27th, 1920. ... Se 306 IV.—On the Manufacture of Thymol, Menthone and Menthol from Eucalyptus Oils. By H.G. Smitu, r.c.s., and A. R. PENFOLD, FCS. Issued November 30th, 1920. let ‘iste V.—A New Species of Queensland Ironbark. By RB. H. CAMBAGE, F.L.S. [ With Plate J.] [ssued November 15th, 1920. VI. —On Aphrophyllum Hallense, gen. et sp. nov. and Lithostro- tion from the neighbourhood of Bingara, N.S. Wales. By STANLEY SMITH, M.A., D.Sc, F.G4.8. (Communicated by Prof. W. N. Benson, D.Sc, F.G.s. [With Plates IIT-V.] Issued November 30th, 1920. at aie ae aD me VII.—Descriptions of three new species of Tne peie By J. H. MarIpEn, I.s.0., F.R.S. Issued November 15th, 1920... VIII.—Early Drawings of an Aboriginal Ceremonial Ground. By R. H. CamBaGs, F.L.S, and Henry SevxirKx. [ With Three Diagrams.| Issued November 15th, 1920. IX.—A Geological Reconnaissance of the Stirling Ranges of Western Australia. By W. G. WooLNnouau, D.&c., F.G.S. [With Plate VI.] Issued November 30th, 1920. r, X.—The Volcanic Neck at the Basin, Nepean River. By G. D. OSBORNE, B.se. (Communicated by Prof. T. W. E. DavVIb, C.M.G., D.S.0., F.B.S.) Ba es Plate VII.] Issued December 6th, 1920. oi “02 500 vee XI.—Acacia Seedlings, Part VL ‘Ee R. H. CamBaag, F.L.S. [With Plates VIIIT-X.] Issued December 30th, 1920. sas XII.—On a Box Tree from New South Wales and Queens- land. By J. H. Mar1pEn,t.s.o., F.R.s. Issued December 30:h, 1920. . ver XIII. Le Stee on The tae No. IX, sates Aecriene of three new species. By J. H. Marpen, 1.8.0., F.z.s. Issued December 30th, 1920. ee sue ae ate see wa Paae. A 25 37 40 43 51 66 74 79 113 146 163 167 ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. ART. (iv.) XIV.—On a new Angophora. By J. H. MaipEn, 1.s.0., F.B.S. Issued December 30th, 1920. a iets os XV.—The calculation of refractive index in random sections of minerals. By Leo A. Corron, M.A., D.Sc, and Miss Mary M. PEART, B.Sc. Issued January 28th, 1921.. x XVI.—The Stethoscope, with a reference to a function of the Auricle. By Professor J. A. PoLLOCK, D.sc., F.R.S. Issued February 8th, 1921. XVII.—The Essential Oils of Lata ‘jie var. grandiflorum and Leptospermum odoratum. By A. R. PENFOLD, ¥F.c.s. Issued February 21st, 1921. XVIII.—Eucalyptus Oil Glands. By M. B. Wetcu, Bsc. von 208 [With Piates XI-XIV.| Issued February 21st, 1921. XIX.—The Temperature of the Vapour arising from boiling Saline Solutions. By G. Harker, D.sc, Issued February Zit, LOZ S.. ae sie toe set Bee XX.—Notes on two Acacias. By J. H. MAIDEN, 1I.S.0., F.R.S., F.u.s. Issued February 28th, 1921. XXI.—Notes on Leptospermum flavescens var. grandiflorum. By E. Cure. Issued February 28th, 1921. ... ABSTRACT OF PROCEZDINGS ore aie wet ae Se 1. — PROCEEDINGS OF THE GEOLOGICAL SECTION ... PROCEEDINGS OF THE AGRICULTURAL SECTION PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION OF INDUSTRY TiTLE Pace, Conrents, Novices, PUBLICATIONS, ... cae (i. OFFICERS FOR 1920-1921... List oF MEMBERS, &c. INDEX TO Vo.LumE LIV... Pagar 175 177 187 197 218 227 233 XXIV, XXV. — XXXIV. . Xxxv.— xiii. ~-xhin—xilyr — vi.) . (vil) (ix.) bo lve NOTICE. Tue Roya Society of New South Wales originated in 1821 as the “ Philosophical Society of Australasia”; after an interval of inactivity, it was resuscitated in 1850, under the name of the ‘“¢ Australian Philosophical Society,” by which title it was known until 1856, when the name was changed to the ‘ Philosophical Society of New South Wales”; in 1866, by the sanction of Her Most Gracious Majesty Queen Victoria, it assumed its present title, and was incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881. TO AUTHORS. Authors of papers desiring illustrations are advised to consult the editors (Honorary Secretaries) before preparing their drawings. Unless otherwise specially permitted, such drawings should be carefully executed to a large scale on smooth white Bristol board in intensely black Indian ink, so as to admit of the blocks being prepared directly therefrom, in a form suitable for photographic “process.” The size of a full page plate in the Journal is 44 in. x 6?in. Thecost of all original drawings, and of colouring plates must be borne by Authors. ERRATA. Page 54, line 20, for germination, read gemmation. , 06, line 14, for Peérificate Derbiencia, read Petrificata Derbiensia. | 60, line 28, for /ateseptatum, read latiseptatima, », 62, line 27, for helotype, read holotype. ,, 124, line 33, for assimulation, read assimilation, . Lol, in analysis (A), for MgO 2:12, read MgO 9:12. = to2, line | for 10:56, read 70:367. ,, 133. line 12, for bastite, read enstatite, , 137, Total for Norm of (A), for 100°09, read 100-03. ., 154, line 30, for areole, read areola. » 191, line 11, for Fig. 2, read Fig. 3. PUBLICATIONS. O The following publications of the Society, if in print, can be obtained at the Society’s House in Hlizabeth-street:— Transactions of the Philosophical] Society, N.S. W., 1862-5, pp. 374, out of print. Vol. 1 Transactions of the Royal Society, N.S. W., 1867, pp. 83, 3 9 II 29 oy) oP) or) oy) 8, 39 ; ” 9 III 9 ” ” ” 7) 1869, ” 173, 9 ” IV 9 9 9 ” ” 1870, 99 106, ” 99 Vv 99 99 99 99 39 1371, 99 72, 99 9 vI 99 ” oe) ” 9 1872, 59 123, 59) ” vil ” 9 29 29 ”? 1873, ” 182, 9 ” VIII 29 9 29 29 29 1874, 9 anIGS ” 9 1X 3) 9 ” ” 29 1875, 9 239, 9 ” x ” ”» oF) 99 ” 1876, ” 333, 9 9 XI ” 29 ” ” 29 1877, ” 305, ” ns xt Journal and Proceedings _,, as 1878, ,, 324, price 10s.6d. ” XIII ” ” oe) 29 29 1879, +) 259, oy) ” XIV 3) ” ” ” 29 1880, ” 391, 9 ” XV ” ” 9 9 ” 1881, ” 440, 29 ” XVI ” ” 9 ” ” 1882, ,, 327, 50 ” xvil ” ” ” ” ” 1883, ” 324, ”? 9 XVIII Be) ” ” 29 ob 1884, 9 224, ” ” XIX 9 ” ” 9 ” 1885, y) 240, 9 ” XX ” ” 39 29 9 1886, oe) 396, 29 ” XXI oe) ” ” ” ” 1887, +) 296, ” ” XXII ” ” ” 9 ” 1888, oy) 390. x) ” XXII ” ” ” +) 29 1889, 9 534, 29 ” XXIV ” oF) ” ” ” 1890, ry) 290, ”? ” XXV oe) ” 29 ” ” 1891, oy) 348, 2 99 XXVI 9 ” ” oy) ” 1892, 99 426, . ” XXVII 29 29 oy) 29 29 1893, or) 530, ” 95 XXVIII » » » » », 1894,,, 368, 4, ” XXIX 99 9 9 99 +) 1895, oe) 600, ”? ” XXX ” ” 29 29 29 1896, 9 568, 9 ” XXXI oy) 9 29 ” 29 1897, oy) 626, 29 » XXXII 2 09 » » », 1898,,, 476, 55 9» XXXII 9 » ” » », 1899, ,, 400, _,, 9» XXXIV ” a9 ” ” ” 1900, ” 484, ” ” XXXV oe) ” ” ” ” 1901, ” 581, oe) ” XXXVI ” 29 99 99 > 1902, 29 531, ” VIL a a A = “A 1908, ,, 663, a »,» XXXVITI oe) ” ” ” ” 1904, ” 604, 9 ” XXXIX ” 29 ” 29 29 1905, ” 274, 29 ” XL ” 9 oe oe) 99 1906, 29 368, 29 Ms) XLI 99 99 99 99 99 1907, 99 377, 39 be) XLII 99 99 99 99 29 1908, 99 593, +9 9 XLII 39 99 99 99 99 1909, >) 466, 399 9) XLIV ” 9) 99 99 99 1910, be) 719, 99 99 XLV 399 99 $9 99 99 1911, 3) 611, br) be) XLVI 9 9” 39 99 9 1912, 9) 275, 9) be) XLVII 99 99 99 99 39 1918, 39 318, 99 99 XLVIII ” ” 99 9) 99 1914, 99 584, 9) 99 XLIX 99 99 99 99 99 1915, 9 587, 99 ” L ” ” ” 99 ” 1916, ,, 362, ” 99 LI 299 99 99 93 9 1917, 99 786, 9 99 LII 39 99 bh} 99 99 1918, 9 624, 99 LUI ” 99 99 99 99 1919, 33 414, 2 be) - LIV 3 ‘a a * iy 1920, ,, 312, price £1 1s. opal Society of Hew South Gales. Sree EG ney SS iE @ikv nl oZ@— LOZ. Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONOURABLE HENRY WILLIAM, BARON FORSTER, pP.c., K.c.M.a. Governor-General of the Commonwealth of Australia. Vice-Patron: HIS EXCELLENCY SIR WALTER EDWARD DAVIDSON, x.c.m a. Governor of the State of New South Wales. President: J. NANGLE, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S. Vice-Presidents: T. H. HOUGHTON, mn. Inst. c.z. W. S. DUN. J. H. MAIDEN, 1.s.0., F.R.s., F.u.S. | Prof. Sir EDGEWORTH DAVID, K.B.E., CMG., D.S.O., F.R.S. Hon. Treasurer: Prof. H. G, CHAPMAN, mp. Hon. Secretaries: k. H. CAMBAGE, F.1L.s. | J. A. POLLOCK, psc., F.R.s. Members of Council: C. ANDERSON, m.a., D.sc. Prof. J. READ, M.A., PH_D., B.Sc. E. C. ANDREWS, B.a., F.G@.s. H. G. SMITH, F.c.s. R. GREIG-SMITH, p.sc. C. A. SUSSMILCH, F.a.s. CHARLES HEDLEY, ge... J. VICARS, m.z. F, H. QUAIFE, M,A., M,D, Prof.W, H.WARREN, LL.D., WH.se, FORM OF BEQUEST. FE bequeath the sum of £ to the RoyvyaL Society OF New SoutnH WaAtgs, Incorporated by Act of the Parliament of New South Wales in 1881, and I declare that the receipt of the Treasurer for the time being of the said Corporation shall be an effectual discharge for the said Bequest, which I direct to be paid — within calendar months after my decease, without any reduction whatsoever, whether on account of Legacy Duty thereon or otherwise, out of such part of my estate as may be lawfully applied for that purpose. [ Those persons who feel disposed to benefit the Royal Society of New South Wales by Legacies, are recommended to instruct their Solicitors to adopt the above Form of Bequest. | LIST OF THE MEMBERS OF THE Aopal Society of Mew South CAales. a ee a a a aaa P Members who have contributed papers which have been published in the Society’s Transactions or Journal. The numerals indicate the number of such contributions. tf Life Members. Elected. 1908 1877 1918 1904 1898 1905 1919 1909 1915 1919 1878 1919 1894 1894, 1919 1896 1908 1918 1895 1894 1877 1919 1909 1919 Pd P2 P8 P 26 sea | PQ PZ Abbott, George Henry, B.A.,M.B.,ChM., 185 Macquarie-street; p.r. ‘Cooringa,’ 252 Liverpool Road, Summer Hill. Abbott, W. E., ‘Abbotsford,’ Wingen. Adam, George Hyslop, ‘Lintrose,’ Warren Road, Marrickville. Adams, William John, m. 1. mecH.’z., 175 Clarence-street. Alexander, Frank Lee, William-street, Granville. Anderson, Charles, M.A., D.Sc. Edin., Director of the Australian Museum, College-street. Anderson, Robert Gladstone, c/o Chas. Anderson & Co., Ltd., Albion-street, Surry Hills. Andrews, Ernest C., B.A., F.G.S.. Government Geologist, Department of Mines, Sydney. Armit, Henry William, m.r.c.s. Hng., u.R.c.P. Lond., B.M.A. Building, Elizabeth-street. Aurousseau, Marcel, B se., Department of Geology, University of Western Australia, Perth, W.A. Backhouse, His Honour Judye A. P., m.a., ‘ Melita,’ Elizabeth Bay. . Baker, Henry Herbert, 15 Castlereagh-street. Baker, Richard Thomas, Fr.t.s., Curator, Technological Museum. ftBalsille, George, ‘ Lauderdale,’ NE. Valley, Dunedin, N.Z. Bardsley, John Ralph, ‘The Pines,’ Lea Avenue, Five Dock. Barff, H. E., m.a., Warden of the University of Sydney. Barling, John, u.s., ‘St. Adrians,’ Raglan-street, Mosman. Barr, Robert Hamilton, Australasia Chambers, 2 Martin Place. Barraclough, Sir Henry, K.B.&., B.E., M.M.E., M. INST. C.E., M.1I. MECH. E., Memb. Soc. Promotion Eng. Education; Memb. Internat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Professor of Mechanical Engineering in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘Marmion,’ Victoria-street, Lewisham. Baxter, William Howe, u.s., Chief Surveyor, Existing Lines Office, Railway Department, Bridge-street. Belfield, Algernon H., ‘ Eversleigh,’ Dumaresq. Benjamin, David, c/o Sweet Bros., King-street, Newtown. Benson, William Noel, p.sc. Syd., B.A. Cantab., F.c.s., Professor of Geology in the University of Otago, Dunedin, N.Z. Bettley-Cooke, Hubert Vernon, 225 Castlereagh-street. Elected 1916 1929 1915 1913 1905 1888 1893 1898 1907 ds79 1917 1920 1910 1876 1916 1917 1891 1919 1919 1914 1906 1913 1898 1890 1919 1907 1909 1904 1907 1876 1897 1920 Py P2 Piz P 4 (x.) Birrell, Septimus,“Florella,”’ Dunslaffnace-st., Hurlstone Park. Bishop, Eldred George, Belmont-street, Mosman. Bishop, John, 24 Bond-street. Bishop, Joseph Eldred, Killarney-street. Mosman. Blakemore, George Henry, 4 Bridge-street. {Blaxland, Walter, F.R.c.s. Eng., LR.c.p. Lond., ‘Gundaroo,’ Wallaroy Road, Double Bay. Blomfield, Charles E., B.c.z. Melb., ‘ Woombi,’ Kangaroo Camp, Guyra. Blunno, Michele, Licentiate in Science (Rome), ‘Havilah,’ No. 1, Darlinghurst Road, Darlinghurst. Bogenrieder, Charles, u.a., No. 2 Little’s Avenue, Balmain. {Bond, Albert, 64 Wentworth Court, Flizabeth-street. Bond, Robert Henry, ‘ Elfindale,’ Croydon Avenue, Croydon Pk. Booth, Edgar Harold, B.sc.. Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physics in the University of Sydney. Bradley, Clement Henry Burton, m.B., ch,M., D.p.H., ‘Nedra,’ Little-street, Longueville. Brady, Andrew John, u.K. and qQ.c.P. Irel., u.r.c.s. Irvel., 175 Macquarie-street, Sydney. Brage, James Wood, B.A., c/o Gibson, Battle &Co. Ltd.,Kent-st. Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., B.Sc, Government Agrostologist, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Brennand, Henry J. W., B.A.,M.B., chm. Syd., 203 Macquarie- street; p.r.‘Wobun,’ 310 Miller-steet, North Sydney. Bretnall, Reginald Wheeler, The Australian Museum, Sydney. Briggs, George Henry, 8B.sc,, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physics in the University of Sydney. Broad, Edmund F., ‘Cobbam,’ Woolwich Road, Hunter’s Hill. Brown, James B., Resident Master, Technical School, Gran- ville; p.r. ‘Aberdour,’ Daniel-street, Granville. Browne, William Rowan, B.sc., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Geology in the University of Sydney. {Burfitt, W. Fitzmaurice, B.A., B.Sc. M.B., Chm. Syd., ‘Wyom- ing,’ 175 Macquarie-street, Sydney. Burne, Alfred, p.p.s., Buckland Chambers, 183 Liverpool-st. Burrows, George Joseph, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Chemistry in the University of Sydney; p.r. Watson-street, Neutral Bay. Burrows, Thomas Edward, m. INST. c.E., L.s., Metropolitan Engineer, Public Works Department; p.r. ‘ Balboa,’ Fern- street, Randwick. Calvert, Thomas Copley, assoc. M. INST. c.E., Department of Public Works, Sydney. Cambage, Richard Hind, L.s.,¥.u.s., Under Secretary for Mines, Department of Mines, Sydney; p.r. Park Road, Burwood. (President 1912). Hon. Secretary. é Campbell, Alfred W., u.p., ch.m. Edin., 183 Macquarie-street. Cape, Alfred J., m.a. Syd., ‘Karoola,’ Edgecliff Road, Edgecliff. Cardew, John Haydon, M. INST. C.E., L.S., Commercial Bank of Australia Chambers, George and Margaret-streets. Carleton, George Brabason, B.E. Syd., ASSOC. M. INST. C.E., Public Works Department, Sydney. ®lected 1891 1909 1920 1903 1913 1909 1913 1909 1876 1906 1896 1920 1913 1904 1913 1882 1919 1909 i919 1892 1886 1912 -1920 1875 1890 1876 1910 1886 P3 P3 P2 P10 P 20 P2 Pl P2 P3 12a! Bs Pi (xi.) Carment, David, r.1.a. Grt. Brit. € Irel. ¥.¥.4., Scot., 4 Whaling Road, North Sydney. Carne, Joseph Edmund, F.a.s., ‘Dimlands,’ Dickson-street, Homebush. Carruthers, Sir Joseph Hector, m.t.c., M.A. Syd., LL.D. St. And. Scotland, ‘Highbury,’ Waverley. Carslaw, Horatio S., m.a., Se.p., Professor of Mathematics in the University of Sydney. Challinor,. Richard Westman, F.1.c., F.c.s., Lecturer in Chem- istry, Sydney Technical College. Chapman, Henry G., m.p., B.s., Professor of Physiology in the University of Sydney. Hon. Treasurer. Cheel, Edwin, Botanical Assistant, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. Cleland, John Burton, m.p., ch.m., Professor of Pathologyinthe University of Adelaide. (President 1917.) Codrington, John Frederick, u.r.c.s. Hng., L.R.c.P. Lond, and Edin , ‘Roseneath,’ 8 Wallis-street, Woollahra. Colley, David John K., ‘Kaskie,’ Abbey-street, Leura. Cook, W. E., m.c.e. Melb., mM. Inst. c.E., Burroway-street Neutral Bay. Cooke, Frederick, c/o Meggitt’s Limited, Parramatta. Cooke, William Ernest, M.A., F.R.A.s., Government Astronomer and Professor of Astronomy in the University of Sydney, The Observatory, Sydney. Cooksey, Thomas, Pn.D., B.Sc. Lond., F.1.c., Government Analyst; p.r. ‘Clissold,’ Calypso Avenue, Mosman. Coombs, F. A:, F.c.s., Instructor of Leather Dressing and Tanning, Sydney Technical College; p.r. 55 Willoughby Road, North Sydney. Cornwell, Samuel, g.P., Brunswick Road, Tyagarah. Cotton, Frank Stanley, B.sc, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physiology in the University of Sydney. Cotton, Leo Arthur, M.a., D.Se., Assistant Professor of Geology in the University of Sydney, Cowdery, Edward Henry, t.s., 6 Castlereagh-street, Sydney. Cowdery, George R., assoc. M. INST. C.E., Blashki Buildings, Hunter-st.; p.r.. ‘Glencoe,’ Torrington Road, Strathfield. Crago, W. H., .R.c.s. Eng., u.R.c.P. Lond., 185 Macquarie-st. Curtis, Louis Albert, u.s., ‘ Redlands,’ Union-street, Mosman. Danes, Jiri Victor, Pr.D. Prague, 40 Bayswater Road, Darling- hurst. Dangar, Fred. H., c/o W. G. Deuchar, Loftus-street. Dare, Henry Harvey, ™.£., M. INST. C.E., Commissioner, Water Conservation and Irrigation Commission, Union House, George-street. Darley, Cecil West, mu. inst. o.z., Australian Club, Sydney. Darnell-Smith, George Percy, D.sc., F.1.c.,F.c.s., Department of Agriculture, Sydney. P 22| David, Sir Edgeworth, K.B.5., C.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., D.Sc. F.R.S., F.G.S., Professor of Geology and Physical Geography in the University of Syduey. (President 1895, 1910.) Vice-President. Elected 1885 | P3 1919 1894 1915|P1 1916 1906 1876 1913 1913 | P 2 1920 1908 | P 4 1919 1918 1916 | P2 1908 1896 1887 1902 1910 1909 | P5 1920 1881 1920 1888 1879 1920 1905 1904 1907 1899 1881 (xil.) Deane, Henry, M.A., M. INST, C.E., F.L.S., F.R. MET. SOC., F.R.H.S.,. ‘Campsie,’ 14 Mercer Road, Malvern, Victoria. (President 1897, 1907.) de Beuzeville, Wilfrid Alex. Watt, Forestry Assessor, Forest. Office, Tumbarumba. Dick, James Adam, c.m.a., B.A. Syd., M.D., Ch.M., F.B.C.S. Edin.,. ‘Catfoss,’ Belmore Road, Randwick. Dick, Thomas, J.p., Port Macquarie. Dixon, Jacob Robert L., m.z.¢.s., L.R.c.P., Demonstrator in. Physiology in the University of Sydney. Dixson, William, ‘ Merridong,’ Gordon Road, Killara. Docker, His Honour Judge E. B., u.a., ‘Mostyn,’ Billyard Avenue, Elizabeth Bay. Dodd, Sydney, p.v.se, F.R.c.v.s., Lecturer in Veterinary Pathology in the University of Sydney. Doherty, William M., F.1.c., F.c.s., Second Government Analyst, ‘ Jesmond,’ George-street, Marrickville. Downing, Reginald George, B.8c. (Agr.) Field Branch, Depart- ment of Agriculture, Sydney. Dun, William S., Paleontologist, Department of Mines, Sydney.. (President 1918.) Vice-President. Earp, George Frederick, ¢.B.E., M.L.c., 8 Spring-street. Elliott, Edward, c/o Reckitts’ (Oversea) Ltd., Bourke-street,. Redfern. Enright, Walter J., B.a., High-street, West Maitland, N.S.W. Esdaile, Edward William, 54 Hunter-street. Fairfax, Geoffrey E., 8. M. Herald Office, Hunter-street. Faithfull, R. L., u.p., New York, u.R.c.v., L.8.A. Lond., c/o Iceton,. Faithfull and Maddocks, 25 O’Connell-street. Faithfull, William Percy, ‘The Monastery,’ Kurraba Road, Neutral Bay. Farrell, John, Riverina Flats, 265 Palmer-street, Sydney. Fawsitt, Charles Edward, p.sc, Pn,p., Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney. (President 1919). Ferguson, Eustace William, m.s., ch.m., ‘Timbrabongie,’ Gor- don Road, Roseville. Fiaschi, Thos., M.D., M.ch, Pisa, ‘Beanbah,’ 285 Macquarie-st.. Fisk, Ernest Thomas, Wireless House, 97 Clarence-street. Fitzhardinge, His Honour Judge G. H., m.a., ‘Red Hill,” Beecroft. tForeman, Joseph, m.R.c.s. Hng. u.R.c.P. Edin., ‘ Wyoming,’ : Macquarie-street. Fortescue, Albert John, ‘Benambra,’ Loftus-street, Arnceliffe.. Foy, Mark, Elizabeth and Liverpool-streets. Fraser, James, (¢.M.G., M. INST. C.E., Chief Commissioner for Railways, Bridge-street; p.r.‘Arnprior, Neutral Bay. Freeman, William, c/o A. Freeman, Byron Arcade, Inverell. French, Sir J. Russell, k.8.z., General Manager, Bank of New South Wales, George-street. Furber, T. F., F.B.4.s., L.s., c/o Dr. R. I. Furber, ‘Sunnyside,” Stanmore Road, Stanmore. Plected 1917 1918 1920 1897 1916 1899 1912 1912 1919 1891 1919 1880 1912 1892 1919 1919 1916 1912 1887 1909 1919 1916 1912 1905 1913 4919 1918 1884 1919 1916 1914 Pl P 16 P 4 Pa | ate. P3 Pl Pk (xili.) Galbraith, Augustus Wm.,.c.z., City Engineer, Perth, W.A. Gallagher, James Laurence, B.A. Syd., Unwin’s Bridge Road, Marrickville. Gilbert, Sydney Joseph, M-R.¢.Vv.s., Gould, The Hon. Sir Albert John, k.B., v.p., ‘ Eynesbury,’ Edgecliff. Green, Victor Herbert, 7 O’Connell-street, Sydney. Greig-Smith, R., p.sc. Hdin., M.sc. Dun., Macleay Bacteriologist, Linnean Society’s House, Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay. (President 1915.) Grieve, Robert Henry, B.a., ‘ Langtoft,’ Llandaff-st.,Waverley. Griffiths, F. Guy, B.a., M.D., chm., ‘Woolgan,’ Lane Cove Road, Killara. Grutzmacher, Frederick [Lyle, Church of England Grammar School, North Sydney. Guthrie, Frederick B., F.1.c., F.c.s., Department of Agricul- ture, 137 George-street. (President 1903). Hack, Clement Alfred, Collins House, 360 Collins-street, Melbourne. Halligan, Gerald H., u.s., F.a.s., Avenue Road, Hunter’s Hill. Hallmann, E. F., B.sc,, 75 Hereford-street, Forest Lodge. Halloran, Henry Ferdinand, L.s., 82 Pitt-street. Hamblin, Charles Oswald, B.sc., Department of Agriculture, Sydney. Hambridge, Frank, 58 Pitt-street. Hamilton, Arthur Andrew, ‘The Ferns,’ 17 Thomas-st., Ashfield Hamilton, Alexander G., ‘Tanandra,’ Hercules-st., Chatswood. Hamlet, William M., F.1-c., F.cs., Member of the Society of Public Analysts ; ‘Glendowan,’ Glenbrook, Blue Mountains. B.M.A. Building, 30 Elizabeth-st. (President 1899, 1908). Hammond, Walter L., B.sc., High School, Broken Hill. Hardie, Robert Walter, J.p., *Coombe-Martin,’ Park Road, Burwood. Hardy, Victor Lawson, “The Laurel, 43 Toxteth Rd., Glebe Pt. Hare, Arthur J., Under Secretary for Lands, ‘ Booloorool,’ Monte Christo-street, Woolwich. Harker, George, p.se., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Organic Chemistry in the University of Sydney. Harper, Leslie F., F.a.s., Ge logical SECTS Department of Mines, Sydney. Harrison, Launcelot, B Sc., Syd., B.A. Cantab., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Zoology in the University of Sydney. Hassan, Alex. Richard Roby, c/o W Angliss & Co. Ppty. Ltd., 64 West Smithfield, London, EC. Haswell, William Aitcheson, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Emeritus Pro- fessor of Zoology and Comparative Anatomy in the Uni- versity of Sydney; p.r. ‘Mimihau, Woollahra Point. Hay, Alexander, m.u.rx., Coolangatta, N.S.W. Hay Dalrymple-, Richard T., t.s.,Chief Commissioner of Forests, N.S. Wales; p.r. Goodchap Road, Chatswood. Hector, Alex. Burnet, 481 Kent-street. Elected, 1891 1899 1916 1919 1919 1884 1918 1920 1916 1901 1905 1920 1919 1919 SHU) 1891 yy) 1906 | 1913 1920 191 1917 1904: TOL7 1905 1918 1916 1909 1911 P3 Be P3 Eas il P15 (xiv.) Hedley, Charles, v.u.s., Australian Museum, Sydney. (President 1914.) Henderson, James, F.R.8.Ss., ‘ Wahnfried,’ Drummoyne. Henderson, James, ‘ Dunsfold,’ Clanalpine-street, Mosman. Henriques, Frederick Lester, 56 Clarence-street. Henry, Max, D.S.0., B.V.Sc., M.R.C.V.s., ‘Coram Cottage,’ Essex-- street, Epping. Henson, Joshua B., assoc. M. Inst. c.E., Hunter District Water Supply and Sewerage Board, Newcastle. Hindmarsh, Percival, u.a., Teachers’ College, The University, Sydney. Hinds, Herbert Henry, 484 Kent-street, Sydney. Hoggan, Henry James, ‘ Lincluden,’ Frederick-st., Rockdale. Holt, Thomas §S., ‘Amalfi,’ Appian Way, Burwood. Hooper, George, Assistant Superintendent, Sydney Technical College; p.r. ‘ Branksome,’ Henson-street, Summer Hill. Hordern, Anthony, c/o Messrs. A. Hordern & Sons Ltd , Brick- field Hill. Horsfall, William Nichols, u.s., B.s. Melb., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physiology in the University of Sydney. Hoskins, Arthur Sidney, Eskroy Park, Bowenfels. Hoskins, Cecil Harold, Windarra, Bowenfels. Houghton, Thos. Harry, M. INST. C.E., M.I. MECH. E., 63 Pitt-st. (President 1916), Vice-President, | Houston, Ralph Liddle, ‘ Noorong,’ Cooper-street, Strathfield. Howle, Walter Cresswell, u.s.a. Lond., ‘Lugano,’ 244 Military Road, Mosman. Hudson, G. Inglis, J.p., F.c.s., ‘Gudvangen,’ Arden-st., Coogee.. Hulle, Edward William, Commonwealth Bank of Australia. Hunt, Charles James, B.A., ‘rinity Grammar School, Dulwich Hill. Hurse, Alfred Edward, a.m.i.c.ze., Dumbuck Hotel, near Dumbarton, Scotland. Jaquet, John Blockley, a.R.s.M., F.G.s., Chief Inspector of Mines,. Department of Mines, Sydney. Jenkins, Richard Ford, Engineer for Boring, Irrigation Com- mission, 6 Union-street, Mosman. Jensen, Harold Ingemann, D.sc., Treasury Chambers, George- street, Brisbane. Johns, Morgan Jones, A.M.1.E.5. Lond , M.1.E. Aust., w.1.M. Aust., Mount Morgan Gold Mining Co., Mount Morgan, Queensl’d.. Johnston, Stephen Jason, B.A., D.Sc, Professor of Zoology in the University of Sydney. Johnston, 'homas Harvey, M.aA., D.Sc., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., Professor of Biology in the University of Queensland, Brisbane. Julius, George A., B.Sc., M.E., M.I. MECH. E., Culwulla Chambers, Castlereagh-street, Sydney. Elected 1883 1873 1914 1887 1919 1901 1896 1920 1919 1878 1881 1877 1911 1913 1906 1920 1916 1909 1883 1906 1884. 1887 1878 1876 1903 1891 1920 1919 1919 P 4 P 1 P 23 P 3 (xv.) Kater, The Hon. H. E., s.e., u.u.c., Australian Club. Keele, Thomas William, L.s., M. INST. c.E., Commissioner, Sydney Harbour Trust, Circular Quay; p.r. Llandaff-st., Waverley, Kemp, William E., a.m. Ins’. c.z., Public Works Department. Coff’s Harbour Jetty. Kent, Harry C., u.A., F.R.1.B.A., Dibbs’ Chambers, 58 Pitt-st. Kesteven, Hereward Leighton, D.Sc, M.D., Ch.m., Bulladelah, New South Wales. Kidd, Hector, M. INST. C.E., M. I. MECH. E., Cremorne Road, Cremorne. King, Kelso, 14 Martin Place. Kirehner, William John, B.sc., ‘Clyde,’ Cavendish-street, Con- cord West. Kirk, Robert Newby, 25 O’Connell-street, Knages, Samuel T., u.p. Aberdeen, F.R.0.8. Irel., ‘Maibenbrook,’ Longueville Road, Longueville. Knibbs, G. H.,c.M.G.,F.S.S., F.B.A.S.,L.8., Member Iaternat. Assoc. Testing Materials; Memb. Brit. Sc. Guild; Commonwealth Statistician, Melbourne, ‘Rialto,’ Collins-st., Melbourne. (President 1898.) Knox, Edward W., ‘ Rona,’ Bellevue Hill, Double Bay. Laseron, Charles Francis, Technological Museum. Lawson, A. Anstruther, D.Sc. F.R.S.E., F.L.s., Professor of Botany in the University of Sydney. Lee, Alfred. ‘Glen Roona,’ Penkivil-street, Bondi. Le Souef, Albert Sherbourne, Taronga Park, Mosman. L’Estrange, Walter William, 55 Albert Road, Homebush. | Leverrier, Frank, B.A., B.Sc, K.c., 182 Phillip-street. Lingen, J. T., m.a. Cantab., k.c., University Chambers, 167 Phillip-street, Sydney. Loney, Charles Augustus Luxton, M. AM. SOc. REFR. E., Equi- table Building, George-street. | MacCormick, Sir Alexander, m.D., c.M. Edin., M.R.c.s. Hng., 185 Macquarie-street. | MacCulloch, Stanhope H., m.B., ch.m. Hdin., 24 College-street. 'MacDonald, Ebenezer, 3.p., c/o Perpetual Trustee Co., Ld., Hunter-street, Sydney. Mackellar, The Hon. Sir Charles Kinnaird, kK.c.M.G., M.L.C., M.B., c.M. Glas., 183 Liverpool-street, Hyde Park, Sydney. McDonald, Robert, J.p., u.s., Pastoral Chambers, O’Connell-st.; p.r. ‘ Lowlands,’ William-street, Double Bay, McDouall, Herbert Crichton, m.R.c.s. Eng., .R.c.s. Lond., D.P.H. Cantab., Hospital for the Insane, Gladesville. McDowall, James Campbell, B.sc, NZ., 264 Botany Road, Alexandria. McGeachie, Duncan, ‘Craig Royston,’ Toronto, Lake Mac- quarie. McGlynn, William Henry, ‘Wybara,’ Doncaster Avenue, South Kensington. Elected 1906 1891 1880 1917 1901 1894. 1916 1909 1883 1880 1920 1920 1908 °1914 1919 1912 1905 1889 1879 1879 1915 1893 P2 P9 J eau P 42 Pot P8 P3 (xvi.) McIntosh. Arthur Marshall, ‘Moy Lodge,’ Hill-st., Roseville. McKay, R. T., L.s., M. INST. c.E., Commonwealth Engineer for Wheat Storage, ‘ Rialto,’ Collins-street Melbourne. McKinney, Hugh Giffin, m.z., Roy. Univ. Irel., Mm. 1NsT. ©.E., Sydney Safe Deposit, Paling’s Buildings, Ash-street. McLean, Archibald Lang, m.p., cn.m., B.A.. ‘Gartfern,’ North Abbotsford. McMaster, Colin J., u.s., Chief Commissioner of Western Lands; Box 20, G.P.O. Sydney. McMillan, Sir William, k.c.m.a., 281 Edgecliff Road, Wool- lahra; 79 York-street. McQuiggin, Harold G., B.sc, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Physiology in the University of Sydney; p.r. ‘ Berolyn,’ Beaufort-street, Croydon. Madsen, John Percival Vissing, p.sc., B.E., Professor of Elec- trical Engineering in the University of Sydney. Maiden J. Henry, J.P.,1.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.R.H.S., Hon. Fellow Roy. Soc. S.A.; Hon. Memb. Roy. Soc, W.A.; Netherlands Soc.for Promotion of Industry; Philadelphia College Pharm. Southern Californian Academy of Sciences; Pharm. Soc. N.S.W.; Brit. Pharm. Conf.; Corr. Fellow Therapeutical Soc., Lond.; Corr. Memb. Pharm. Society Great Britain ; Bot. Soc. Edin.; Soc. Nat. de Agricultura (Chile); Soc. d’ Horticulture d’ Alger; Union Agricole Calédonienne; Soc. Nat. etc.,de Chérbourg; Roy. Soc. Tas.; Roy. Soc. Queensl.; Inst. Nat. Genévois; Hon. Vice-Pres. of the Forestry Society of California; Diplomé of the Société Nationale d’Acclimatation de France; Linnean Medallist, Linnean Society; N.S.W. Govt. Rep. of the “ Commission Consulta- tive pour la Protection Internat. de la Nature”; Corr. Memb. National Acclimatisation Society of France; Govern- ment Botanist and Director, Botanic Gardens, Sydney. (President 1896, 1911.) Vice-President. Manfred, Edmund C., Montague-street, Goulburn. | Mann, Cecil William, 116 Crown-street, Darlinghurst. Mann, James Elliott Furneaux, Barrister at Law, 163 Phillip- street. Marshall, Frank, c.m.G., B.D.s., 141 Elizabeth-street. Martin, A. H., Technical College, Sydney. | Martin, Robert, m.B., chm. Syd., Assistant Medical Officer, Mental Hospital, Gladesville. Meldrum, Henry John, p.r. ‘ Craig Roy,’ Sydney Rd., Manly. Miller, James Edward, Albury, New South Wales. Mingaye, John C. H., F.1.c., F.c.s., Assayer and Analyst to the Department of Mines; p.r. Campbell-street, Parramatta. Moore, Frederick H., Union Club, Sydney. Mullins, John Francis Lane, m.a. Syd., M.u.c., ‘ Killountan,’ Darling Point. Murpby. R. K., Dr. Ing., Chem. Eng., Lecturer in Chemistry, Technical College, Sydney. Nangle, James, 0.B.E., F.R.A.S., Superintendent of Technical Education, Tbe Technical Colleve, Sydney; p.r. ‘ St. Elmo,’ Tupper-street, Marrickville. President. Elected 1917 1891 1920 1919 1903 1913 1896 1919 4917 1891 1920 1880 1920 1899 1918 1909 1879 1881 1919 1887 1917 1896 1910 1918 1919 1918 1914 1893 P2 P2 P8 Pi2 (xvil.) Nash, Norman C., ‘Ruanora,’ Lucas Road, Burwood, tNoble, Edward George, u.s., 8 Louisa Road, Balmain. Noble, Robert Jackson, B.sc., wer) ‘Arleston,’ Wallace-street, Burwood. Oakden, Frank, c.z., 33 Hunter-street. fOld, Richard, ‘ Waverton,’ Bay Road, North Sydney. Ollé, A. D., F.c.s.. ‘Kareema,’ Charlotte-street, Ashfield. Onslow, Col. James William Macarthur, B.A., Lu.B., ‘Gilbulla,’ Menangle. Oram, Hector, 24 Upp2r Bay View-street, Lavender Bay, North Sydney. Ormsby, Irwin, ‘Caleula,’ Allison Road, Randwick. Osborn. A. F., assoc. mu. inst. c.E., Water Supply Branch, Sydney, ‘Uplands,’ Meadow Bank, N.S.W. Paine, William Horace, State Abattoirs, Homebush Bay,N.S.W. Palmer. Joseph, 96 Pitt-st.; p.r. Kenneth-st., Willoughby. Penfold, Arthur Ramon, Technological Museum, Harris-street, Ultimo. Peterson, 'l'. Tyndall, r.c.p.a., E.S. & A. Bank Building, King and George-streets. Petrie, James Matthew, p.sc. F.1.c, Research Fellow of the Linnean Society in Biochemistry, The University, Sydney. Pigot, Rev. Edward F., s.J., B.a., M.B. Dub., Director of the Seismological Observatory, St. Ignatius’College, Riverview. Pittman, Edward F., assoc. R.s.m., L.s., ‘The Oaks,’ 65 Park- street, South Yarra, Victoria. | Poate, Frederick, r.R.a.s, u.8., ‘Clanfield,’ 50 Penkivil-street, Bondi. Poate, Hugh Raymond Guy, m.B., cn. Mm. Syd., F.R.c.s. Eng., L.R.c.P. Lond., 225 Macquarie- -street, Pollock, J. A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Corr. Memb. Roy. Soc. Tasmania; Roy. Soc. Queensland ; Professor of Physics in the University of Sydney. Hon. Secretary. Poole, William, B.B., A.M. INST. C.E., L.s., 906 Culwulla Cham- bers, Castlereagh-street. Pope, Roland James, B.a., Syd., M.D., ¢.M., F.R.C.S., Edin., 183 Macquarie-street. Potts, Henry William, F.L.s., F.c.s., c/o Lindley Walker & Co., Ltd., Mark Lane, Sussex- street, Sydney. Powell, a ohn, 170-2 Palmer-street. Pratten, Herbert H., Senator, 26 Jamieson-street. Priestley, Henry, B.sc, M.D., ch.M., Associate Professor of Physiology in the University of Sydney. Purdy, John Smith, p.s.0.,u.p.,c.m. Aberd., D.p.H. Camb., Metro- politan Medical Officer of Health, Town Hall, Sydney. Purser, Cecil, B.A., M.B., Chm. Syd., 193 Macquarie-street. Elected 1876 1912 1919 1916 1909 1914 1920 1915 1884: 1895 1897 1893 1915 1919 1917 1920 1920 1913 1892 1919 1904. 1918 1883 1917 1900 1910 1882 1893 1916 1919 1917 1892 [ Pi P2 Pal Pal Pat Pl P 4 P 56 (xviii. ) Quaife, F. H., m.a., M.p., M.s., ‘ Yirrimbirri,’ Stanhope Road,. Killara. Radcliff, Sidney, r.c.s., B.M.A. Building, 30 Elizabeth-street. Ranclaud, Archibald Boscawen Boyd, B.sc., B.E., Lecturer in Physics, Teachers’ College, The University. | Read, John, M.A., Pn.D., B.Sc, Professor of Organic Chemistry in the University of Sydney. Reid, David, ‘ Holmsdale,’ Pymble. Rhodes, Thomas, ‘High Coombe,’ Carlingford. Richardson, John James, A.M.1I.n.E. Lond., ‘ Kurrawyba,” Upper Spit Road, Mosman. Ross, A. Clunies, B.sc., c/o G. R. W. McDonald, 32 Elizabeth-st. toss, Chisholm, m.p. Syd., u.B., c.M. Kdin., 155 Macquarie-st. Ross, Herbert E., Equitable Building, George-street. Russell, Harry Ambrose, B.A.,c/o Sly and Russell, 369 George- street; p.r. ‘ Mahuru,’ Fairfax Road, Bellevue Hill. Rygate, Philip W., m.a., B.e. Syd., ASSOC. M. INST. C.E., L.S.,, 12 Castlereagh-street. Sach, A. J., ¥.c.s., ‘ Kelvedon,’ North Road, Ryde. Sandy, James Montague, ‘ Blenheim,’ Minna-street, Burwood. Sawkins, Dansie T., u.a., ‘‘ Brymedura,’ Kissing Point Road, Turramurra. Sawyer, Basil, B.z. The Clyde Engineering Co., Granville. Scammell, Rupert Boswood, B.sc., Syd., 18 Middle Head Road, Mosman. Scammell, W. J., Mem. Pharm. Soc. Grt. Brit., 18 Middle Head Road, Mosman. Schofield, James Alexander, F.c.s., A.R.S.M., Assistant Pro- fessor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney. Sear, Walter George Lane, 14 Roslyndale Avenue, Woollahra. Sellors, Richard P., B.a. Syd., ‘ Mayfield,’ Wentworthville. Sevier, Harry Brown, c/o Lewis Berger and Sons (Aust.) Ltd.,. 16 Young-street. Shellshear. Walter, m. inst. c.£,, Mitchell-street, Greenwich Point, Greenwich. Sibley, Samuel Edward,‘ Garnella,’ Blenheim-st., Randwick. Simpson, R. C., Technical College, Sydney. Simpson, William Walker, ‘Abbotsford,’ Leichhardt-street,. Waverley. Sinclair, Eric, u.p., c.m. Glas., Inspector-General of Insane, 9 Richmond Terrace, Domain ; p.r. ‘ Broomage,’ Kangaroo-- street, Manly. Smith, Henry G., rF.c.s., Assistant Curator, Technological Museum, Sydney; p.r. 321 Illawarra Road, Marrickville. (President 1913.) Smith, Stephen Henry, Department of Education, Sydney. Spencer- Watts, Arthur, ‘Araboonoo,’ Glebe-street, Randwick. Spruson, Wilfred Joseph, Duily Telegraph Building, King-st. P 2,| Statham, Edwyn Joseph, assoc. mM. INST. c.z., Cumberland Heights, Parramatta. lege P8 J ea (xix.) Steel, Frederick William, c/o General Chemical Co. Ltd., Parramatta Road, Auburn. Stephen, Alfred Ernest, rF.c.s., 801 Culwulla Chambers, 67 Castlereagh-street, Sydney. Stephens, Frederick G. N., F.R.C.S., M.B., Ch.M., 13 Dover Road, Rose Bay. Stephens, John Gower, B.Sc, St. Andrew’s College, The Uni- versity, Sydney. Stewart, Alex. Hay, B.z., 165 Wardell Road, Dulwich Hill. | Stewart, J. Douglas, B.V.se., M.B.C.V.S., Professor of Veterinary Science in the University of Sydney; ‘ Berelle,’, Homebush Road, Strathfield. Stoddart, Rev. A. G., The Rectory, Manly. Stokes, Edward Sutherland, m.s. Syd., ¥.z.c.p. Irel., Medical Officer, Metropolitan Board of Water Supply and Sewerage, 341 Pitt-street. Stone, W.G., Assistant Analyst, Department of Mines, Sydney. Stroud, Sydney Hartnett, r.1.c., The University, Sydney. Sullivan, Herbert Jay, c/o Lewis Berger and Sons (Aust.) Ltd., Rhodes. , Sulman, John, Warrung-st., McMahon’s Point, North Sydney, Sundstrom, Carl Gustaf, c/o Federal Match Co., Park Road. Alexandria. Siissmilch, C. A., F.a.s., Technical College, Newcastle, N.S.W. Sutherland, George Fife, a.R.c.sc, Lond., Lecturer in Mechan- ical Engineering, in the University of Sydney. Sutton, Harvey, 0.B.E.,M.D., D.P.H. Melb , B.sc Oxon., ‘Lynton,’ Kent Road, Rose Bay. Swain, E. H. F., Director, Forestry Department, Brisbane. Swain, Herbert John, B.a. Cantab., B.sc., B.E. Syd., Technical College, Ultimo. Tate, Herbert, Bridge Road, Stanmore. Taylor, Harold B., B.sc, Kenneth-street, Longueville. {Taylor, James, B.Sc, a.R.S.M. ‘Cartref,’ Brierly-st., Mosman. Taylor, John M., m.a., uu.B. Syd., ‘ Woonona,’ 43 East Crescent- street, McMahon’s Point, North Sydney. Tebbutt, Arthur Hamilton, B.a., M.B., D.P.H., 185 Macquarie-st. Teece, R., ¥.1.4., F.F.A., Wolseley Road, Point Piper. Thomas, F. J., ‘Lovat,’ Nelson-street, Woollahra. Thomas, John, t.s., Chief Mining Surveyor, Mines Department Sydney; p.r. ‘Remeura,’ Pine and Harrow Roads, Auburn. Thomson, The Hon. Dugald, Carabella-st., North Sydney. Thompson, Joseph, M.a., LL.B., Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt- street, Sydney. Thorne, Harold Henry, B.A. Cantab., B.sc. Syd., Lecturer in Mathematics in the University of Sydney; p.r. Rutledge-st., Eastwood. Tietkens, William Harry, ‘Upna,’ Eastwood. Tilley, Cecil E., Demonstrator in Geology in the University of Sydney. Tillyard, Robin John, M.a., D.8c., F.L.S., F.E.8., Biological Branch,. Cawthron Institute, Nelson, New Zealand. Trebeck, P. C., ‘Alameda,’ Queen-street, Bowral. lected 1900 1919 1916 1883 1890 1892 1903 I) 1910 1910 1879 1899 1919 1917 1903 1891 1901 1918 1913 1883 1919 1919 1919 1876 1910 POT ASLO 127 P 4 PZ P 4 Paz Pl (xx.) Turner, Basil W., A.R.S.M., F.c.s., Victoria Chambers, 83 Pitt-st. Turner, Eustace Ebenezer, B.A. Cantab., M.sc. Lond., A.1.C., Lecturer and Demonstrator in Organic Chemistry i in the University of Sydney. Valder, George, g.p., Under Secretary and Director, Depart- ment of Agriculture, Sydney. Vause, Arthur John, m.B., c.m. Edin., ‘Bay View House,’ Tempe. Vicars, James, m.B., Memb. Intern. Assoc. Testing Materials; Memb. B. 8S. Guild; Challis House, Martin Place. Vickery, George B., 78 Pitt-street. Vonwiller, Oscar U., B.sc, Associate Professor of Physics in the University of Sydney. Waley, Robert George Kinloch, 63 Pitt-street. Walker, Charles, ‘Lynwood,’ Terry Road, Ryde. Walker, Harold Hutchison, Vickery’s Chambers, 82 Pitt-st. Walker, H. O., Commercial Union Assurance Co., Pitt-street. tWalker, The Hon. J. T., F.R.c.1., Fellow of Institute of Bankers Ena., ‘ Wallaroy,’ Edgecliff Road, Woollahra. Walkom? Arthur Bache, p.sc., Linnean Hall, 23 Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay. Wallas, Thomas Irwin, 175 Macquarie-street. Walsh, Fred,. J.e , Consul-General for Honduras in Australia and New Zealand; For. Memb. Inst. Patent Agents, Lon- don; Patent Attorney Regd. U.S.A.; Memb. Patent Law Assoc., Washington; Regd. Patent Attorn. Comm. of Aust; Memb. Patent Attorney Exam. Board Aust.; George and Wynyard-streets; p.r. ‘Walsholme,’ Centennial Park, Syd. Walsh, Henry Deane, B.a.1. Dub., M. INST. C.E., ‘ Fermagh,’ Leura, N.S.W. (President 1909.) Walton, R. H., F.c.s., ‘Flinders,’ Martin’s Avenue, Bondi. Ward, Edward Naunton, Superintendent of the Botanic Gar- dens, Sydney. Wardlaw, Hy. Sloane Halcro, p.se. Syd., 87 Macpherson-street, Waverley. Warren, W.H., LL.D, WH.SC., M. INST. C.E., M. AM. SOC. C.E., Member of Council of the International Assoc. for Testing Materials, Professor of Engineering in the University of Sydney. (President 1892, 1902.) Waterhouse, Lionel Lawry, B.n. Syd., Lecturer and Demon- strator in Geology in the University of Sydney. Waterhouse, Walter L., B.sc. (Agr.), ‘Cairnleith,’ Archer-st., Chatswood. Watkin-Brown, Willie Thomas, 24 Brown’s Road, Kogarah. Watkins, John Leo, B.A. Cantab., u.a. Syd., Selbourne Cham-. bers, Phillip-street. Watson, James Frederick, m.B., Cch.M., ‘Midhurst,’ Woollahra. Watt, Robert Dickie, m.a., B.gc, Professor of Agriculture in the University of Sydney. Wearne, Richard Arthur, B.a., Principal, Central Technical College, Brisbane. * Etected 1920 1907 1920 1881 1909 1918 1892 1920 1917 1890 1891 1906 | P 8 1916 1917 1916 1918 1914 1918 1911 1914 1908 1908 |P 57 | i (xxat)) Welch, Marcus Baldwin, B.sc., A.t.c., Technological Museum. Welch, William, F.8.G s., ‘ Roto-iti, Boyle-street, Mosman. Wellish, Edward Montague, m.a., Lecturer in Applied Mathe- matics in the University of Sydaey. tWesley, W. H., London. — White, Charles Josiah, B.sc., Lecturer in Chemistry, Teacher’s College; p.r. ‘ Kooringa,’ Robinson-street, Chatswood. White, Edmond Aunger, m.a.I.M.z., c/o Electrolytic Refining and Smelting Co. of Australia Ltd., Port Kembla, N.S.W. White, Harold Pogson, F.c.s., Assistant Assayer and Analyst, Department of Mines; p r. ‘Quantox,’ Park Road, Auburn. Williams, Harry, a.1.c., Challis Flats, Phillip-street. Willington, William Thos., 0.B.2., King-street, Arncliffe. Wilson, James T.,M.B., ch.m. Edin., F.R.S., Professor of Anatomy in the University of Cambridge, England. Wood, Percy Moore, t.R.c.p. Lond., M.R.c.s. Eng., ‘ Redcliffe,’ Liverpool Road, Ashfield. Woolnough, Walter George, D.Sc. F.4.s., c/o Geological Depart- ment, The University, Sydney. Wright, George, c/o Farmer & Company, Pitt-street. Wright, Gilbert, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Agricultural Chemistry, Department of Agriculture, The University, Sydney. Youll, John Gibson, Water Conservation and Irrigation Com- mission, Leeton, N.S.W. Young, John Anthony, c/o Lewis Berger and Sons (Aust.) Ltd., 16 Young-street. HonorRARyY M=zMBERS. Limited to Twenty. M.—Recipients of the Clarke Medal. Bateson, W. H., m.A., F.B.Ss., Director of the John Innes Horti- cultural Institution, England, The Manor House, Merton, Surrey, England. Chilton, Charles, M.A., D.Sc, M.B.,c.M. etc., Professor of Biology at Canterbury College, Christchurch, N.Z. Hemsley, W. Botting, uu.p. (Aberdeen), ¥.R.S., F.L.S., Formerly Keeper of the Herbarium, Royal Gardens, Kew; Korresp. Mitel. der Deutschen Bot. Gesellschaft; Hon. Memb. Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural; New Zealand Institute; Roy. Hort. Soc., London; Kew Lodge, St. Peter’s Road, Broadstairs, Kent, England. Hill, James P., D.se., ¥F.R.S., Professor of Zoology, University College, London. Kennedy, Sir Alex. B. W., Kt., Lu.pD., D. ENG., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Engineering in University College, London, 17 Victoria-street, Westminster, London S.W. *Liversidge, Archibald, M.a., LL.D., F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Chemistry in the University of Sydney, ‘ Fieldhead,’ George Road, Coombe Warren, Kingston, Surrey, England. (President 1889, 1900.) * Retains the rights of ordinary membership. Elected 1872. lected, 1915 1912 1894 1900 1915 4912 1915 1877 (xxii.). Maitland, Andrew Gibb, r.a.s., Government Geologist of Western Australia. Martin, C. J., c.M.G., D.Sc., F.R.S., Director of the Lister Institute of Preventive Medicine, Chelsea Gardens, Chelsea Bridge . Road, London, S.W.I. Spencer, Sir W. Baldwin, k.c.M.G., M.A., D.Sc, F R.S., Emeritus Professor of Biology in the University of Melbourne. M | Thiselton-Dyer, Sir William Turner, K.C.M.G., C.1.E., M.A., LL.D., Sc.D., F.B.S., The Ferns, Witcombe, Gloucester, England. Thomson, Sir J. J., 0.M., D.Sc., F.B.S., Nobel Laureate, Master of Trinity College, Cambridge, England. OBITUARY 1920-21. Ordinary Members. Smart, Bertram James. Watts, Rev. W. Walter White, Rev. W. Moore. AWARDS OF THE CLARKE MEDAL. Established in memory of THE Revp. W. B. CLARKH, m.a., F.R.s., F.G.8., etc., Vice-President from 1866 to 1878. To be awarded from time to time for meritorious contributions to the ‘Geology, Mineralogy, or Natural History of Australia. The prefix * indicates the decease of the recipient. - Awarded 1878 1879 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1891 1892 * Professor Sir Richard Owen, K.¢.B., F.R.S. *George Bentham, C.M.G., F.R.S. *Professor Thos. Huxley, F.R.s. *Professor F. M’Coy, F.R.S., F.G.S. *Professor James Dwight Dana, LL.D. *Baron Ferdinand von Mueller, K.c.M.G., M.D., Ph.D., F.B.S., F.L.S. *Alfred R. C. Selwyn, LL.D., F.B.S., F.G.S. *Sir Joseph Dalton Hooker, o.m., @.C.8.1.,C.B., M.D., D.C.L., LL.D.,F.B.S. *Professor L. G. De Koninck, m.p. *Sir James Hector, K.c.M.G., M.D., F.B.S. *Rev. Julian E. Tenison- Woods, F.G.8., F.L.S. *Robert Lewis John Ellery, F.n.s., F.R.A.S. *George Bennett, M.D., F.R.c.S. Eng., F.L.S., F.Z.S. *Captain Frederick Wollaston Hutton, F.R.8s., F.G.S. Sir William Turner Thiselton Dyer, k.c.M.G.,¢.1.E.,M.A., LL.D., Sc. D., F.R.S., F.L.S., late Director, Royal Gardens, Kew. (xxill.) Awarded 1893 *Professor Ralph Tate, F.1.s., F.a.s. 1895 Robert Logan Jack, F.a.s., F.R.4.s., late Government Geologist, Brisbane, Queensland. 1895 *Robert Etheridge, Jnr. 1896 *The Hon. Augustus Charles Gregory, c.M.G., F.R.G.S. 1900 *Sir John Murray, k.c.B., LL.D., Sc. D., F.R.S. 1901 *Edward John Eyre. 1902 *F. Manson Bailey, c.M.a.. F.L.S. 1903 *Alfred William Howitt, p.sc., F.G.S. 1907 Walter Howchin, F.a.s., University of Adelaide. 1909 Dr. Walter E. Roth, B.a., Pomeroon River, British Guiana, South America. 1912 *W. H. Twelvetrees, F.G:s. 1914 A. Smith Woodward, .tu.p., F.R.s., Keeper of Geology, British Museum (Natural History) London. 1915 Professor W. A. Haswell, m.a., D.sc., F.R.S., The University, Sydney. 1917 Professor Sir Edgeworth David, !k.B.E., ¢.M.G., D.S.0., B.A., D.Sc., F.B.S., F.G S., The University, Sydney. 1918 Leonard Rodway, c.u.c., Honorary Government Botanist, Hobart, Tasmania. 1920 Joseph Edmund Carne, F.a.s., late Government Geologist, N.S.W. ‘Dimlands,’ Dickson-street, Homebush. AWARDS OF THE SOCIETY’S MEDAL AND MONEY PRIZE. Money Prize of £25. Awarded, 1882 John Fraser, B.a.,West Maitland, for paper entitled ‘ The Aborigines of New South Wales.’ 1882 Andrew Ross, u.p., Molong, for paper entitled ‘Influence of the Australian climate and pastures upon the growth of wool.’ The Society’s Bronze Medal and £25. 1884 W. E. Abbott, Wingen, for paper entitled ‘Water supply in the Interior of New South Wales.’ : 1886 S.H. Cox, F.a.s.,¥F.c.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Tin deposits of New South Wales.’ 1887 Jonathan Seaver, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘Origin and mode of occurrence of gold-bearing veins and of the associated Minerals.’ 41888 Rev. J. E. Tenison-Woods, F.a.s., F.u.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Anatomy and Life-history of Mollusca peculiar to Australia.’ Awarded. 1889 1889 1891 1892 1894: 1894 1895 1896 (xxiv.) Thomas Whitelegge, r.R.m.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘ List of the Marine and Fresh-water Invertebrate Fauna of Port Jackson and Neighbourhood.’ Rev. John Mathew, mu.a., Coburg, Victoria, hem paper entitled ‘The Australian AWoninneee Rev. J. Milne Curran, F.a.s., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The Micro- scopic Structure of Australian Rocks.’ Alexander G. Hamilton, Public School, Mount Kembla, for paper entitled ‘The effect which settlement in Australia has pro- duced upon Indigenous Vegetation.’ J. V. De Coque, Sydney, for paper entitled the ‘ Timbers of New South Wales.’ R. H. Mathews, t.s., Parramatta, for paper entitled ‘The Abori- ginal Rock Carvings and Paintings in New South Wales.’ C. J. Martin, v.sc. M.B., F.R.S., Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The physiological action of the venom of the Australian black snake (Pseudechis porphyriacus).’ Rev. J. Milne Curran, Sydney, for paper entitled ‘The occurrence of Precious Stones in New South Wales, with a description of the Deposits in which they are found.’ PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS, By CHARLES EDWARD FAWSITT, DSc., Ph.D. [ Delivered to the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, December 3, 1919. ] BEFORE proceeding with the particular subject of my address, I desire to congratulate the Society on the large and unprecedented increase in its membership during the past year. The success of this year has been largely due to the efforts of Mr. R. H. Cambage, whom I should like to mention specially on account of his valuable services in the interests of the Society. The Society is also much indebted to Professor Chapman, Professor Pollock, and Dr. R. Greig-Smith. The Council of the Society has graciously consented to my accepting the Presidential Chair with the knowledge that I would not be able to deliver an address at the usual time for such an-address, May 1920, and the Council agreed to this being delivered in December 1919. In accepting the position under these circumstances, I am trespassing, to some extent on the generosity of members, but if I am excused, I may say that I hoped to find men of this gener- ous nature among members of the Royal Society of New South Wales. A scientific training has surely failed, if it does not inculcate in a man breadth of view, and charity in judgment on his fellows and in particular his fellow- scientists. . THE UNIFORMITIES OF NATURE. We have all heard from time to time such expressions as “The Uniformity of Nature,’ ‘‘The Principle of Con- tinuity,” *‘Nature never makes jumps,’ ‘*The Laws oj Nature,” “The Law of Universal Causation.” A—May 5, 1920. 2 C. E. FAWSITT. Uniformities of Nature. While each of these statements may bea true statement under certain conditions, it is rather misleading to talk of the Uniformity of Nature. ‘The Uniformities of Nature” however, may serve for our purpose as a title to express generally our belief (1) in the regularity of occurrence of many natural events, (2) that most phenomena in the natural world obey definite laws, (3) that every effect has its cause, and that the same cause always produces the same efiect, other things being equal. It is, I believe, supposed by some, that, ultimately, with a perfect and all embracing grasp of the natural world, we could show many or all of the Uniformities of Nature to be parts of a Uni- formity of Nature, but we are not yet within sight of the realisation of such a possibility. The subject of “‘The Uniformities of Nature”’ is a philo- sophical as well as a scientific one, and I am indebted not only to scientific work for some of my subject matter, but also to a large extent to Mr. A. J. Balfour’s “‘Gifford Lec- tures for 1914,’’ a book which puts certain rather difficult philosophical questions very lucidly. Mr. Balfour after writing of the relation of cause and effect, summarises the position in regard to the Uniformities of Nature in his own way :{) ‘“‘It is not enough that the course of Nature should be deter. mined. It must be determined after a particular pattern, its uniformity must conform to a particular type...... It is not enough that the condition of the world should be strictly deter- mined by its condition at the preceding moment. Such a world would, I suppose, completely conform to the doctrine of uniformity, and obey both in spirit and letter the law of universal causation. Yet, unless it conformed to the additional canon I have laid down, it would provide no basis either for scientific knowledge or for practical decision. .... » . Science requires uniformities more than uniformity.” eo PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. We shall proceed then to consider some aspects of nature showing Uniformities and by contrast, other aspects show- ing Irregularities and Discontinuities. Law and Order in Nature. In a general survey of nature, our attention is arrested by becoming acquainted with the laws and regularities which have so far been shown to exist in regard to natural phenomena. But it is quite as arresting to examine certain phenomena and the results.of observations of nature which indicate abruptness of change, discontinuity or irregularity. So anxious is the human mind to believe in the orderliness of nature, that all such cases of irregularity or abrupt change are usually considered to be cases which are only apparently irregular or abrupt, and that an intimate enough acquaintance and deep enough understanding of nature would show that this belief was justified. For example, where some apparent irregularity occurs, it may be suffici- ent that a certain law (which we thought should hold good) be altered in such a way as to include the new observation, or it may be that some new unsuspected condition exists in our observation which has not hitherto been taken into account. At any rate we all expect that the anomalous result of to-day will probably be cleared away before long on account of the discovery of other facts and sometimes of more comprehensive laws; and our expectations as a whole may be said to be justified. This desire to evoke order out of disorder is undoubtedly on the right lines. Alteration of Laws to meet new facts. One’s first idea in discovering some new fact, which does not fit in to the known laws, is to discredit the accuracy of the observation or the deductions from it; if, however, the observation can be repeated and the deductions there- from can be shown to be proper, the second thought to some of us is one of annoyance or impatience with nature, 4 Cc. E. FAWSIT'S. that she should be different from the scheme we had arranged for her to fit in to; this phase, however, does not last long, and we become aware that it is best to take nature _ as she is, and build up some new theory to cover the new observation. Our belief, then, in the uniformities of nature — goes beyond our present knowledge, but it is in the best interests of scientific progress that we should hold to it. By examination of new facts showing apparent irregulari- ties or by an examination of cases of abrupt change, new lines of investigation suggest themselves; and from a practical point of view, examination of the exceptional case is usually fruitful. The Number of Conditions in an Experiment. A novice at experimental work is usually taught, and taught rightly, to believe that if he keeps to the same con- ditions of work (as far as they are known) he should be able to repeat any experiment with identical results. If he cannot, then he is a bad experimenter. A little more experience, however, will bring to an experimenter in certain lines of work some uncertainty as to when all the conditions for an experiment are the same. For example, experience may suggest to me that provided the tempera- ture and pressure are kept constant, or within narrow limits at any rate, ina given experiment, I may expect the results to be independent of other conditions, e.g., light- radiation, but it is never possible to be absolutely certain that one is correct in regarding other influences as negli- gible. To quote again from Balfour:—) “Choose the most perfect experiment on record, idealise the conditions to your heart’s content; for greater security, suppose it repeated to weariness, how will you be advanced? There are, I suppose, millions of circumstances, for the most part utterly unknown, which have coexisted with al] the experiments already tried, but will have vanished before the next experiment is under- taken. Does this disturb you? ... Notat all... . You trust PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. a) yourself to a feeling of antecedent probability, and your trust will sometimes be betrayed.” A Case of Discontinuity. It is on record) that in order to show how the continuity of the longest sequences may be broken, Babbage devised a machine, “‘which produced numbers according to a particular law for an indefinite period, then broke this uniformity by a single exception, and, thereafter reverted for ever to its original principle of action.”’ And so in all scientific work, although we may repeat experiments again and again with identical results, this may be for example, because some small quantity of impurity was present (or absent) in all cases, or because the surface of our vessels of experiment had in all cases approximately the same amount and kind of other matter absorbed at the outset; and possibly in the next time of experiment, the conditions may have altered, and the results with them. Any experimenter witha little expevri- ence is so well aware of these facts that he finds it advis- able in some experiments to compare the results with other “‘check’’ experiments, carried out, if possible, on the same day. In this way we try to do all that is possible to guard against any unthought of condition arising as the experiments are in progress. It often strikes us as very strange that we may repeat an experiment many times with a certain definite result, and then on a further repeat obtain a slightly different result which after some reflection we may be able to ascribe toa slight alteration in pro- cedure. It is in this way, however, that new discoveries are made. Repetition of Experiments. I believe the statement may well be made that the repetition of an experiment is never superfluous. When the personal factor comes into play as in the practice of 6 Cc. E. FAWSITT. medicine, the number of conditions involved is so great that we are never sure what all the conditions of the experiment are. In the matter of the effect of a drug on the human body, it is well known that personal idiosyn- — crasy is very marked. Not only will a dose of any drug (less than the lethal dose) have very different effects, in magnitude at least, on different people, but the same dose of a drug given to the same person at different times may have different effects. In this case we all recognise that the number of factors involved is so great that it is im- possible to know them all. Evolution of Matter. I should like more particularly now to confine myself to such points of interest as arise in a consideration of the (terrestrial) evolution of matter, for even in that question alone there is much both of uniformity and of irregularity to arrest the attention. Atoms-——Matter is Discontinuous in Structure. For over 2000 years the question was debated as to whether the structure of elements was continuous or dis- continuous, i.e., whether atoms existed or not. The existence of the atom was believed in at least as far back as Democritus, 500 B.C. The atom, as the derivation of the word indicates, was formerly always considered to be indivisible, and was at- first considered as simply the smallest conceivable particle of matter. After Dalton (1803-1808) had launched his Atomic Theory, which is still accepted, the atom was defined as the smallest particle of an element which could take part in a chemical action. The atom has had to be believed in without our being able to see it or any effect resulting from its individual action, right down to this generation. Now, at last, the traces of the action of single atoms can PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. ~ be made visible to the eye, as in the Spinthariscope invented by the late Sir William Crookes. It is then at last known positively that atoms do exist. Matter is not continuous in structure. While elementary matter has a structure of atoms, the atoms themselves have astructure which while not quite understood, involves the existence of electrons. ‘‘Atoms”’ are not the smallest things obtainable. ‘The electron is now the smallest thing obtainable. It is a unit of negative electricity, and changes in the properties of the atom are caused by the entrance or expulsion of an electron or by the expulsion of a larger positively charged particle. Structure of the Atom. The exact number of electrons in any atom is not known but it is probably rather more than half the number repre- senting the atomic weight, or rather more than the ‘‘atomic number’ (see below). There is now considered to be in the atom of every element a positive nucleus and one or more surrounding shells in which the electrons revolve. Not only then is the structure of matter discontinuous in that it contains discrete particles (atoms), but the atoms themselves contain smaller discrete units—electrons. Motion within the Atom. According to Jeans) ‘*The problem of determining how the constituents are arranged and move inside the atom is still far from solution. . . Some knowledge of a general kind ean be obtained (from the spectrum),—in particular the laws of motion are necessarily discontinuous, for continu- ous laws of motion would lead to a continuous (atomic) spectrum. . . Planck’sspectral formula (for the continuous spectrum of a solid) could not possibly be arrived at except from a system of laws which involved discontinuities of some kind.”’ 8 Cc. E. FAWSITT. Not only then is the atomic structure discontinuous but the motion of the radiation-emitting electrons is discon- tinuous. | The Creation of Atoms. Again it may be asked how the atoms have come into being. While the atom of any element is an exceedingly complicated structure, and while this structure is only being unfolded with great difficulty, this much is certain, that the atoms of one and the same element are essentially similar in all properties which go to make up the chemical behaviour of the element; it is also supposed that the atoms and chemical properties of any element in the sun are similar to what we have on the earth’s surface. Now all our experience would teach us to believe that in evolution we have also variation, and that one of the factors in evolution (particularly in influencing variation) is the environment. The environment in the sun is very different from that of the earth, and yet the atom of any element in the sun appears to be the same or very nearly the same in regard to spectroscopic examination (a very searching test) as the atom of that element on the earth. Certain characteristics of Atoms independent of Ordinary Environment. | The mass and the radioactivity of an atom are also independent of environment, at any rate independent of any change in the environment that we can create for them. Clerk Maxwell in 1873, said that the atom could not be self existent, and had the essential character of a manufactured article, and that it had not been made by any of the processes we call natural. Evolution in 1873 was not considered as a possibility in the domain of the atomic kingdom. Evolution among the elements. Now although there has not been an evolution in atoms comparable with evolution as understood in the Darwinian PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 8) sense, we are now aware that the atoms of some elements are unstable, and that after a certain “‘life’’ the atom of the radioactive element suddenly explodes. For a single atom the rotation of the rings of electrons in their orbits and the eccentricity of the orbits are apparently such that ata certain moment the whole position is no longer stable, and the atom decomposes into one or more difierent atoms quite suddenly. From one element we can thus in an instant get one or two other elements. The suddenness of the change makes us dislike to use the word evolution here, but at any rate, one species of matter does produce in this case either one new species or two new species. Granted that some might care to call this evolution, still, it applies to only a few of the elements as far as is known. It is true that change might occur in some of the other elements at so slow a rate aS not to be detectable by any available means. Granted again that this is a possibility, we know that when an element changes, it is always (in our experience on the earth’s surface) to an element or elements of equal or lower atomic weight. If every element has arisen by evolution, then we are led back ultimately to a parent of high atomic weight. Uranium is the element of highest known atomic weight. The question therefore arises as to where the uranium atom comes from. If it comes from the atom of some other element, there must at any rate have been one or more primary elements which disinteg- rated into the atoms of uranium and other elements. How do these primary elements arise? At this stage of the enquiry we are baffled. Some elements have arisen from other elements, but no means have yet been discovered of creating an atom of any kind of matter from electrons and a positively charged nucleus. The formation of the atoms, more particularly those of highest atomic weight is still a mystery. 10 G. KE. FAWSITT. It has been pointed out ® that in the gaseous stars of highest temperature hydrogen and helium predominate, while in cooler stars there is no helium but oxygen, carbon, silicon, Magnesium, manganese, calcium, iron, and other metals. One interpretation of this is that these elements— magnesium, Manganese and so on—have arisen from elements of lower atomic weight and not from those of higher atomic weight. Although it is suggested above that elements at present considered stable may be changing excessively slowly into others, there is no real proof that such is the case. The atom of an element like oxygen might be changing very slowly into carbon, but it would be impossible at present to accelerate this rate so as to make it evident, because there does not appear to be any method offering at present of altering the rate of decomposition of these which are unstable and decompose at a measurable rate. Hven although oxygen atoms were ordinarily quite stable, the question arises as to whether instability could be caused in any way, This problem seems as hard of solution as the problem of accelerating the instability. Transmutation of Elements. Experiments undertaken by the late Sir William Ramsay and others to try and transmute the more stable elements. by bringing these into contact with radium salts, are usually now not considered to have given positive results from which definite conclusions could be drawn, although at the time the results of these experiments were first described, transmutation by this contact process appeared to have some foundation in fact, and less surprise was manifested by chemists than might have been expected. Utilisation of Atomic Energy. Sir Charles Parsons in his British Association address in 1919 has drawn attention to the desirability of harnessing PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. Jl for the use of mankind atomic energy and other energies not at present immediately available. It may be noticed that unless the energy within the atom were liberated quickly the energy would not be of much use tous. Radium on decomposing to Niton and Helium liberates energy of an order of about one million times greater than could be obtained by burning radium to radium oxide, but this large intra-atomic energy is only made available over a period extending to many thousands of years. In this particular case, however, the Niton is unstable and has a short life, so that its energy is given up rapidly, and this adds considerably to the energy more immediately obtainable from the radium. Both these cases of transmutation are accompanied by the ejection of an «-particle (Helium). The energy liber- ated by the ejection of 6 particles is not quite so great as that involved in the production of «-particles, but would be well worth obtaining provided the energy were liberated quickly enough. The sudden character of the change when an atom of one element changes into another is remarkable for its abrupt- ness; a moment comes in the life of the atom when the Situation is ripe for the explosion, but this moment is not the same for every atom of the same element, and the period of life for the atom does not depend on the time it has already been in existence. So far as is known, there is no variation in the properties of the atom up to the moment of explosion. When the explosion takes place there is the greatest precision®) in this act, for when an a-particle is ejected, the a-particle is always detectable for the same distance (30 milimetres) and no further. The Periodic Law. It will repay us to study here the Periodic Classification of the elements, and the arrangement, as presently known, 12 Cc. E. FAWSITT. is given below, both in tabular form and in a spiral form. The present Table (I) isa great change on the table as known, say ten years ago. Periodic Classification of Elements. The possibility of naming definitely the vacant places (five) between aluminium and uranium would not have been thought of ten years ago, and it may also be said to be unlikely that there are vacant places between hydrogen and aluminium. The changes that are introduced here in the older Periodic Table are as follows:— (1) It is not now possible to believe that there is any vacancy for an (inert) element between nickel and copper or between palladium and silver. It is therefore, I think, not advisable to retain a special column for the inert gases. They are here put in the same column as the elements iron, nickel, palla- dium, ete. (2) Every element, or rather, each place for an element is num- bered. ‘This number is the ‘Atomic Number.” There is no doubt that, in the light of recent work, iron, cobalt, nickel, and each of the platinum group of elements require a separate place or atomic number. The atomic number appears to correspond or to be closely related to the net positive charge on the nucleus of the atom. (3) For the places numbered 81 to 92 inclusive, it is necessary to give, besides the more important element, other radioactive elements which have identical chemical properties. The atomic weights of some of these are not known with great accuracy and the atomic weights given are put in brackets. (4) Hydrogen is placed in the same column as fluorine. This arrangement is not ideal, but is preferable to leaving it out of the table altogether, or putting it in the same column as lithium, and so suggesting without any evidence that there are elements (undiscovered) between hydrogen and helium. IN 1919—Table |. From 8 down to 0 No: 1 No. 2 Hydrogen / Helium H=1:"008 He=4°0 No. 9 No 10 Fluorine Neon F=19°0 Ne=20'2 No. 17 No 18 Chlorine i Argon C1= 35°46 A=39'88 No. 26 No. 27 No 28 Iron Cobalt Nickel Fe=55'84 Co=58'97 Ni=58'68 No. 36 Bromine : Krypton Br=79°92 Kr=82°92 | 43 No. 44 No. 45 No. 46. Ruthenium ‘Rhodium Palladium Ru=101°7 Rh=102°9 Pd=106°7 No 53 No 54 Iodine Xenon T=126°92 |. X=130°2 61 No. 62 Samarium Sa=150°4 } 0. 75 | No. 76 No. 77 No. 78 : | Osmium Iridium Platinum Os=190°9 Ir=193°1 Pt=195'2 No.8 | No. 86 ——— Niton Nt=222°0 [Thorium Emanation] | Actinium Emanation} ww fi Usual Valency PERIODIC ARRANGEMENT OF THE ELEMENTS AS KNOWN IN 1919—Table I. {Mesothorintm 1 (228)) (Mesothorium 11 (228) (Thorium X (224)) (Actinium X} {Uranium X, (294)) {fonium (230)} {Radiothorium (228)) {Radioactinium] (Uranium Y (280)) (or Brevium) (234) [Eka-Tantajuni 230)) (Uranium 11 (234) 1 2 3 | 4 5or3 6or2 Torl From 8 down to 0 = = — — ——— a — — No.1 Hydrogen H=1°008 nets No. 5 No 6 No.7 | + No. 9 No 10 a fat aun) Boron Carbon Nitrogen Fluorine Neon Be (or GIaol B=1110 C=120 | N=14°01 O=16 F=19°0 Ne=202 No. 11 No. Noi | No. 16 No 16 No. 17 No 18 Sodium Magn Silicon | Phosphorus Sulphur Chlorine Argon } Ni 3°0 Mg=24°32 ~ Si=28'3 | P=31 04 $=3206 C1=3546 A=39'88 | = | == = = E pees Ss | No. 19 No. 20 No- 21 0, 22 No. 28 No. 24 No, 25 No. 26 No. 27 No 28 Potassium Calcium Scandium tanium Vanadium Chromium Manganese Tron Cobalt Nickel K=30t Ca=40°07 Sc=44 1 Ti=481 V=510 Cr=52'0 Mn=54'93 | Fe=55's4 Co=53'97 Ni=58'68 se ee ee (ee a _| = No 29 No.31 | No. 82 No 33 No, 34 No. 35 No. 36 Copper Gallium | Germanium Aasenic Selenium Bromine Krypton cne367 Ga=69'9 | poe Se As=7406 Se=70'2 Br=79'92 Kr=82-02 Talay Nose No. 39 No. 40 ane No. 42 No. 43 No. 44 No.45 | _ No. 46 Rubidium Strontium Yttrium Zirconium (or Columbium) Molybdenum — Ruthenium Rhodium Palladium Rb Sr=87'63 T=88°7 Zr=00'6 Nb (or Cb)=03'1 Mo=96"0 Ru=101'7 Rh=102'9 Pd=106'7 = No. 48 No. 49 No. 61 No. 52 No 53 No 54 Cadmium Indium Antimony Tellurium Todine Xenon Cd=11244 In=114'8 Sn=1187 Sb=i202 Te=127 5 1=126'02 X=130'2 “No. 65) Taleacs ; No. 68 No. 60 No. 62 { Scaesium Lanthanum Cerium Neodymium Bae | Cs=132'S1 La=139'0 Oe=140:25 Nd=144°3 Sa=1504 No. No. 65 No. 66 No 68 Europium Gadoli Terbium Holmium Erbium Eu=162:0 Gd Tb=159'2 Ho=163"5 Er=167'7 Yo. 7 No. 71 7 | e No. 69 0.70 eNO No. 72 No. 73 No. 74 No. 75 No. 76 S, } hulium IT, 2) Ytterbium Lutect Tantalum 75 0.7 No. 77 No. 78 Thulium a ‘or Neoytterbium) MEY aos a Tungsten — Osmium Iridium Platinu Tm=163'°5 CBG Lu=175 Ta=181"5 W=i84'0 | Os=190'0 Wr=1981 Petes No. 79 No. 80 No. 81 Noaae No, 83 No. S4 No.35 | God. | Mercury Thallum et el Bismuth Polonium (210) | AGhES Au=197'2 | He=2006 | Ti=204'0 ai = 207°2 . Bi=208'0 [Radium A (218)] | Nese | (Thorium D (208)) (Radium B(214))| [Radium C (214)] | Thorium A (216)) | : t=222'0 | {Actinium D] [Thorium B (212)} (Radium E ( 10)) ‘Actinium AS (Thorium Emanation)| | [Radium G, (210))| [Actinium B) (Thorium C (212) tren C, (214) 2 2 | (Radium D (210)) {Actinium C] Thorium Cy (212)) | (Actinium Emanation) | | jactntom Ones | | Radium F (210)) _ i hear as = ——- S x No. 90 No. 91 No. 92 No. 87 No. 88 No 89 a one pa Radium: Actinium aoa Uren {unix ists Ra=226'0 Set U= PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. 13 (5) The arrangement of any vertical column is designed to show that an element is similar in valency and other chemical pro perties not always to the element immediately below, but to the next but one. (6) The large Roman numerals (I. — VIII.) in Table II. indicate the usual valency of the element. Table II. Discontinuity within the Periodic Table. Discontinuity in connection with the periodic table has been commented upon in several directions, but in the 14 ©. E. FAWSITT. light of recent research these discontinuities are not so numerous. It was for a long time a puzzle why so many elements had a value for the atomic weight which was not a whole number or even a multiple of 0°5. This is no longer so striking in view of the fact that we must now sometimes put several elements of different atomic weight into the same place of the table. A large proportion of the elements of low atomic number have atomic weights which are whole numbers or very nearly whole numbers, and this almost certainly not accidental. It has been suggested that the mass of the atom of many of these elements might be made up of the mass nuclei of hydrogen and helium, but no definite conclusion in regard to this can be stated yet. The striking difference in the chemical properties that is noticed as we go from one vertical column to another might have been looked upon at one time as a discontinuity; indeed, Soddy said‘® a few years ago that “‘The periodic law expresses a per saltum rather than a gradual change in chemical properties;’’ but the association of this difference, in some cases at any rate, with the loss of an electron in the inner nucleus of the atom, to some extent removes the surprise we might other- wise have in examining the difference in properties in the elements of two neighbouring columns. But one great difficulty remains. The periodic table gives us a great respect for the orderliness of Nature as we proceed from hydrogen (No. I) to lanthanum (No. 57). It is, however, not possible to place the elements Nos. 58 — 72 in any column definitely; if we were determined to do so, we would be forced to put a large number of these elements in one place on account of their similar valencies, which would also be erroneous, as the chemical properties of the individuals of the rare earth-group, while being very similar, are not identical. After this great lapse in regularity, the elements in the table may again be suitably placed from Nos. 73 to PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS. . 15 92. The great regularities noticed at first between the properties of elements, like the halogens or the alkali metals, have resulted in the construction of one of the most interesting and useful diagrams available to the chemist; the use and interest remain, but it will not be possible to be content with the Periodic table until the great irregularity within the series of regularities is better understood. Combination of elements to form compounds. From the elements are obtainable, by combination, com- pounds; and only such compounds have arisen in nature as have not been unstable under the conditions obtaining for the time being. We can, however, prepare in the laboratory many compounds not found in nature. Hach molecule of a compound is an aggregate of elementary atoms. The atom of an element retains unaltered its mass and, if radio- active, its radioactivity, when the atom enters a compound. All other properties are however liable to be altered; for example, the atomic volume is altered. The properties of a compound are not the mean of the properties of the composing elements. 2 3e Plate 11. Journal Royal Society of N.S. W., Vol. WAY, 1920. Journal Royal Socrety of N.S.W., Vol. LIV., 1920. Plate ILI. W. Tams, Photo. » ay Plate IV. Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LIV. 1920. Journal W. Tams, Photo. Plate V. APROPHYLLUM HALLENSE AND LITHOSTROTION. 65 Note.—The stout well-formed columella and the intra- thecal area crowded with sections of tabelle. Compare this with figs. 4, 4a, 4b, and 4c, British form, in which the columella is weakly developed or absent and few inter- sections of tabule. Fig. la. The same, natural size. Fig. 2. Lithostrotion arundineum Eth. fil. Topotype. Transverse section, same locality. (D4.) x2. Fig. 2a. The same, natural size. Fig. 3. Lithostrotion stanvellense Eth. fil. Topotype. Longitu- dinal section. (D 12.) x 2. This section illustrates the most striking difference between Australian and British types. Compare the stout columella and small arched tabelle with the more slender columella and simple tabula in Fig. 6, a specimen from the North of England. Figs. 4, 4a, 4b, 4c. Lithostrotion martini Ed. & H. Transverse section, Narrowdale, Derbyshire, England. x 2. Corallites from same corallum, see note on Fig. 1. Fig. 5. Lithostrotion martini. Transverse section, Alston, Cumberland, England. x 2. This form closely approaches the Australian type in its stout columella and numerous inter-sections of tabule or tabellee. ig. 6. Lithostrotion martini. Longitudinal section, Settle, Yorkshire, England. See note on fig. 3. ee Q PuaTeE V. Luthostrotion—Lithostrotion columnare. Fig. 1. Lithostrotion columnare Eth. fil. Topotype. Transverse section, Lion Creek, Stanwell, near Rockhampton, Queensland. (D 13.) Natural size. Fig. la. The same x 2, Fig. 2. The same. Transverse section. C= columella, E = epitheca T = theca. E—July 7, 1920. 66 J. H. MAIDEN. DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPHCIES OF HUCALYPTUS. By J. H. MAIDEN, 1.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S. [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, July 7, 1920.] 1. HK. CAMFIELDI n. sp. Frutex vel arbor pumila fere Mallee similis, statu immaturo pilis stellatis vestitis, cortice fibrosa; foliis junioribus scabrissimis, pilis stellatis dense vestitis, parvis, cordatis vel orbicularibus, szepe emarginatis; foliis maturis coriaceissimis, nitentibus, oblongis vel late lanceolatis, obliquis, apice obtuso; alabastris ca. 9 capitulo, sessilibus, pedunclo breve, angulatissimis sed post anthesin ovoideis; antheris reniformibus; fructibus hemisphericis ad 1 cm. diametro in capitulis, compressis, capsula 4-loculare, apicibus distincte exsertis. A low branching shrub or stunted tree, almost Mallee- like and under twelve feet in height, and with stems about two inchesin diameter. Covered with stellate hairs when . young. Bark scaly-fibrous or fibrous, flattish, tough—a Stringybark. Juvenile leaves very scabrous, abundantly provided with stellate hairs in the earliest stage, cordate to orbicular, often emarginate, never lanceolate in the young state. Often 2cm. X 2cm. with intermediate sizes up to 4 cm. x 4 cm. (They remind one irresistibly of Angophora cordifolia, and when small as well as young, of Correa speciosa.) Mature leaves remarkably coriaceous and oblong to broadly lanceolate, with a blunt point, oblique, lustrous or shiny, asif varnished. Up to 1 dm. long and say 3°5 cm. broad. Oblique and coarse in the intermediate stage with a mucro. DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS. 67 Buds about nine in the head, small, very angular through compression, becoming ovoid or scarcely angular on anthesis, sessile on a short peduncle or none. Anthers renantherous, but not typically so. Fruits hemispherical, up to 1 cm. in diameter, in heads, compressed, sometimes so much so that they are almost syncarpous, with a shiny dark red rim, capsule 4-celled with the tips distinctly exsert. The type is from Middle Harbour, Port Jackson, 25th May, 1897. Julius Henry Camfield, for many years Overseer of the Garden Palace Grounds, Botanic Gardens, Sydney, who died 26th November, 1916. He was not only an excellent gardener, but a competent botanist, and I have much pleasure in dedicating this interesting species to his memory. Range. On exposed situations on sandstone tops, only known at present between Broken Bay and George’s River, a few miles north and south of Port Jackson, New South Wales. There is little doubt that careful search will greatly extend the range. Following are specific localities :— About half a mile south of the 17 mile post on the Galston Road from Hornsby (W. F. Blakely). The west side of Berowra Creek, Hornsby, or about one and a half miles from the 17 mile post above. Hight to nine feet high, in low Honeysuckle (Banksia) Scrub, Willoughby (A. G. Hamilton). Near the Suspension Bridge, Willoughby (J. L. Boorman). ‘*Looks like E. capitellata. From very stunted trees (very likely saplings from old stumps) only a few feet high. Note the sucker leaves.”’ On the high ground of Middle Harbour (J. H. Camfield, 25th May, 1897). Mosman (W. M. Carne). The following are south of Port Jackson :— Woronora River at Heathcote (J.H.M.and J.L. Boorman). 68 J. H. MAIDEN. A dwarf form, eight feet high, Waterfall (R. H. Cambage No. 4169). Affinity. With E. capitellata, Sm., with which it has long been confused. E. capitellata is a tree, sometimes a large tree, and the organs are all larger, while there is an absence, or almost absence, of stellate hairs in the young shoots. H. Camfieldi is a Mallee, forming a dense undergrowth, from three to about twelve feet high. H. capitellata appears. to be absent from the Hornsby district, where the new species is not rare. The juvenile leaves (suckers) of H. Camfieldi are smaller, more orbicular to cordate, scabrous with a persistent stellate tomentum, apparently always present around the base of the adult plants, forming thickets, similar to the low stunted forms of Angophora cordifolia. They are never lanceolate like those of H. capitellata. The new species has buds smaller than those of E. capitellata and less attenuate, usually ovoid; in some specimens they are almost round and devoid of angles. The common peduncle is shorter than in H. capitellata and quadrangular to nearly terete. The peduncle of H. capi- tellata is very often more compressed in the early bud. The fruits are smaller than those of H. capitellata, but otherwise very similar. The juvenile foliage shown in figures 4a and 4b, Plate 37, Part vill of my ‘‘Oritical Revision of the Genus Kucalyptus,”’ (under E. capitellata) and also figure B, Plate 106, Part XXVIII of my “‘ Forest Flora of New South Wales,” belong to HE. Camfieldi. It is the form (b) for the most part, of p. 493 of this Journal, Vol. Li (1918). 2. KH. DE BEUZEVILLEI 0. sp. Arbor amplaplusve minusve glauca; cortice leve, lamellis longissimis decidua, trunci basi aspero-lamellosa, ligno pallido fere it ‘ . } DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS. 69 albo, gummi venis; foliis fragrantibus, foliis junioribus orbicu- laribus ad cordatis, venis secondariis patentibus vel sursum cur- vatis; foliis maturis lanceolatis, crassis, yenis secondariis basi patentibus postquam longitudinalibus; alabastris angularibus fere alatis, operculo conoideo calycis tubo ca. dimidio zequilongo; fruc- tibus polygonalibus, angularibus, piriformibus vel subglobosis, capsula depressa, sessile vel brevissime pedunculata. A tree of medium or large size, up to 60 feet high, a “White Gum,”’ more or less glaucous, the young branchlets glandular. Bark smooth, but with usually more or less rough-flaky. bark at the butt. Where the rough bark is present it usually ascends the trunk about five to six feet; the deciduous or smooth portion in long strips, not ribbons, some of the pieces being thirty feet long. Timber pale- coloured, almost white, with gum (kino) veins, with a general resemblance to that of H. coriacea. Foliage fragrant. Juvenile leaves almost orbicular to cordate, thin, shortly petiolate, secondary veins spreading or curved upwards, no distinct intramarginal vein. Some leaves measured are 9 cm. long by 7 cm. broad. | Mature leaves lanceolate, slightly falcate, with a short blunt point, thick, slightly shining, the secondary veins spreading at the base, thence longitudinal and parallel to the midrib. Anaverage leaf is about 13 cm. long and about 4cm. in greatest width.. There are leaves intermediate in shape, thickness and venation between the juvenile and immature leaves. Buds remarkably angular by compression, the angles almost winged, peduncles about 1 cm. long, convex to flattened, expanded, especially at the top, pedicels absent or very short, the conoid operculum about half the length of the calyx=-tube. Filaments cream-coloured, anthers renantherous. | 70 J. H. MAIDEN. Fruits polygonal and most of them angled, the angles or ribs persisting until maturity, pear-shaped to sub-globose, sessile or very shortly stalked, walls thick; capsule sunk, 3 or 4-celled. Type from Jounama Peaks, N.S.W., Wilfrid Alexander Watt de Beuzeville, Assistant Forester, Forestry Com- mission, December 1919. Range. So far it has only been found on peaks in the Mount Kosciusko district of New South Wales. ‘* Near the summit of Mount Jounama, at an altitude of 5,400 feet almost. Jounama is one of what is known as the Bogong Peaks in the parish of Jounama, County of Buccleuch, about thirty miles south of Tumut. There is a belt of these trees about five or six miles long by about half a mile wide along the top of the Jounama Peaks. Its lowest level would be between 4500 and 5000 feet. The tree is one of the largest in the district. The buds mature in a few weeks, and the fruits set immediately; in other words, it flowers and fruits in the same year.’’—(de Beuzeville). |A consequence of the severity of the climate during the greater part of the year. | Affinities. 1. With EH. coriacea A. Cunn., var. alpina. It differs in being a much larger and, as a rule, a freer growing plant. — “Have never seen a form like it before. Tree much like the ordinary E. coriacea except for it being much more spreading and gnarled, though this might be accounted for by its exposed position at a high altitude.’’ (de Beuzeville). It has large, mostly oblique leaves, and large angular buds. The fruits are also two or three times as large as those of var. alpina and usually with two or three faint angules, and a more convex rim. Its affinity with the Tasmanian E. coccifera Hook. f., is more remote. DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS. 71 2. With E. gigantea Hook.f. The affinity lies in-the shape of the juvenile leaves (suckers) and more distantly in the fruits. The foliage of both species is fragrant, with the same kind of odour, but H. gigantea is a rough barked species, while H. de Beuzevillei is a Gum. 3. With H. tetragona W.v.M. There is similarity in the polygonal, often quadrangular fruits, which requires a word of caution in case fruits are the only material available. 3d. Ii. EREMOPHILA N. Sp. Frutex vel arbor mediocris, cortice leve, squamosa, ramulis glaucescentibus; foliis junioribus angusto-lanceolatis vel lanceo- latis; foliis maturis lineari-lanceolatis ad lanceolatis, coriaceis, nitentibus, venis secondariis tenuibus sed remotiusculis, non pen- nivenis; pedunculis elongatis, applanatis, pedicellis fere teretibus ca. ) mm. longis, calycis tubo oblongo vel cylindroideo, turbinato, ca. 5 mm, longo; operculo cornuto calycis tubo ca. quinquies equi- longo, diametro distincte minore; filamentis antherisque Cornutis similibus; fructibus cylindroideis vel spheericis, calycis tubo crasso, capsule apice applanato fere margini equante, fructu truncato. A shrub or medium-sized tree, with smooth scaly bark. Branchlets glaucescent. Juvenile leaves (suckers) not available in the earliest stage, but probably narrow. Those of the seedlings are narrow-lanceolate to lanceolate. Mature leaves linear-lanceolate to lanceolate, coriaceous, shiny, not glaucescent, the secondary veins fine but rather distant and, at all events in the intermediate stage, spread- ing and roughly parallel, not feather-veined. Peduncles elongate, flattened, pedicels nearly terete, distinct, about 5 mm. long. Calyx-tube oblong or cylindroid turbinate, about 5 mm. long. 12 J. H. MAIDEN. Operculum sometimes coloured (reddish), straight or horn-shaped, up to 5 times as long as the calyx-tube and much less in diameter. Filaments yellowish, sometimes crimson, angular, glandular, and with anthers as in the Cornute. ; Fruits cylindroid to spherical; top of the capsule nearly flush with the rim, giving the fruit, when not fully ripe, a characteristically truncate, flattish appearance. When the fruit is ripe its mouth becomes rounded and somewhat contracted. Synonym. K. occidentalis Endlicher, var. eremophila Diels, in Engler’s Jahrb. xxxv, 442, 1905. See also my O.R., Part XXXVI, p. 147. Figured at Plate 149, figures 7 — 11 of the same work. | The relations of E. occidentalis Endl. var. grandiflora Maiden (Part xxxvI, ‘‘Critical Revision,”’ p. 149, and figures 1 and 2, Plate 150) to EH. eremophila remain a matter for further consideration. Range. It is confined to Western Australia so faras we know at present, but it is quite possible that it may occur in western South Australia. This isadry country form, and its range may be stated as bounded by Watheroo on the Midland Railway, to 140 miles east of Kalgoorlie, and north of Hsperance and back again to the vicinity of the Great Southern Railway. It probably hasa very extensive range in country of low rainfall. ‘*Shrub four metres high, flowers yellow, calyptra (oper- cula) reddish.’’ Near Coolgardie (Dr. L. Diels, No. 5237). Coolgardie, or rather, Boorabbin (EH. Pritzel, No. 917). I have also received it from Coolgardie (L. C. Webster). The type comes from Coolgardie. Other localities are quoted, op. cit., p. 148. DESCRIPTIONS OF THREE NEW SPECIES OF EUCALYPTUS, 73 Affinities. It is a member of the Cornute. 1. With E. occidentalis Endl. It is sharply separated from this species in its narrow juvenile foliage, that of H. occidentalis being broad. Those of the former are shiny, with more numerous oil dots. Buds usually longer, hence with longer filaments; staminal disc broader. The fruit of H. occidentalis is campanulate, while that of E. eremophila is cylindroid or inclining to hemispherical. 2. With EH. platypus Hook. Here I invite attention to the similarities and dissimilarities I have brought forward at pages 151 and 152 of Part xxxvi of my ‘“‘Critical Revision.”’ 74 hk. H. CAMBAGE AND H, SELKIRK, BARLY DRAWINGS OF AN ABORIGINAL CEREMONIAL GROUND. By R. H. CAMBAGE and HENRY SELKIRK. With Three Text Figures. [Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, August 4, 1920. ] WHAT has been regarded as the earliest plan of an aboriginal Bora or other Ceremonial Ground appears in J. Henderson’s. “Observations on the Colonies of New South Wales and Van Diemen’s Land,” published in 1832.’ The sketchesin ‘‘An Account of the English Colony in New South Wales ’” by David Collins (1804), portray various stages of the initiation ceremony without giving a definite layout of the ground. The rough drawings described in the present paper, however, are of earlier date than Henderson’s, having been made by Surveyor General John Oxley at Moreton Bay in October 1824, and have remained in obscurity for 96 years. (Field Books 216 and 217, Lands Department). These drawings were maile in pencil and the decipherable portions were recently inked in for the purpose of preserving this. interesting ethnological record, but some of the notes are too indistinct to be deciphered. Oxley made these drawings during an expedition to Moreton Bay in 1824 in the cutter ‘‘Mermaid.”” He made three visits to Moreton Bay, the first on his return journey from Port Curtis at the end of November 1823, when the Brisbane River was explored; the second in September and October, 1824, when an extensive marine survey of the bay was carried out; and the third in November and December of the same year, when he was accompanied by His Excellency Sir Thomas Brisbane. 1 See reference by R. H. Mathews, these Proceedings, Vol. xxv1u, 102,. (1894). 2 Now in Mitchell Libraay. eM aduece files b make preace— ; we Lramey oof 07 warh yoga ny 9 : yng fe ohrye yy eas ew cue myrney fr : 7477 rao 377 177, © Fig. 1. Aboriginal Ceremonial Ground, Moreton Bay. 76 R. H. CAMBAGE AND H. SELKIRK. The drawings depict two circular areas enclosed by logs, and connected by a somewhat sinuous passage about seventy yards long, one area at least being about twenty yards in diameter (Figure 1). The purpose of these enclosures is made clear by the following note :—‘* Where the Natives meet after a war with adverse tribes, to make peace.”’ In Barron Field’s Geographical Memoirs of New South Wales (1825), reference is made (p. 70) toa circular pit, about forty feet in diameter, being the scene of combat witnessed by John Finnegan in 1823 between two native women of different tribes, and also between two men at Moreton Bay, while Thomas Pamphlet (Ibid., p. 78), when speaking of an encounter brought about by one native : wishing to take satisfaction of another who had wounded him sometime previously, stated that ‘“‘the spot appointed for the combat was a small ring, about twenty-five feet in diameter, about three feet deep, and surrounded by a. palisade of sticks.’’ The combat was witnessed by about 500 men, women and children.' The rings depicted by Oxley, however, which were not used for combat, but for making peace, do not appear to have been constructed as pits, as the two dots or small inner circles within the smaller ring appear to represent standing trees which were “fantastically crowned at the summit.’’ The drawings shown, Figure 2, are evidently intended as diagrams giving details. 1 Finnegan and Pamphlet, together with Richard Parsons and John Thompson, left Sydney on the 21st March, 1823, in an open boat to bring cedar from the Five Islands (Illawarra). The boat being driven out to sea bya gale of wind, they suffered inconceivable hardships, being twenty- one days without water, during which time Thompson died. The others, on the 16th April, landed on an island which they believed to be south of Jervis Bay, but was really Moreton Island, from which they gained the mainland, discovered the Brisbane River, aud, except Parsons, were found by Oxley when he arrived in Moreton Bay on the 29th November, 1823. Finnegan and Pamphlet were living with the natives near Bribie Island, but Parsons had gone north, as he thought in the direction of Sydney, and was not heard of after. (Field’s New South Wales, p. 89.) EARLY DRAWINGS OF AN ABORIGINAL CEREMONIAL GROUND. Fig. 2. Diagrams giving details of figures in figure 1. 77 78 R. H. CAMBAGE AND H. SELKIRK. Fig. 3. Native’s Representation of a Woman. This Ceremonial Ground is similar in design to a Bora Ground, where the initiation ceremony was carried out, but from Oxley’s note it appears to have been used on the occasion of peacemaking. The representations along the sides of the passage are usually formed of earth and turf, or the design may be cut in the ground. Oxley mentions under date 29th November, 1823, (F.B. 202), that a Sydney native named Bowen, who was with him, understood something of what the Moreton Bay natives said, and on the same date he records seeing a native burial place. We desire to record our thanks to Mr. A. J. Hare, Under Secretary for Lands, for permission to make use of the information contained in Oxley’s fieldnotes. —<—x" —— = - i i GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES, 79 A GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE oF THE STIRLING RANGES oF WESTERN AUSTRALIA. By W. G. WOOLNOUGH, D.Sc., F.G.S. Lately Professor of Geology, University of Western Australia. 7 With Plate VI. [Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, August 4, 1920. TABLE OF CONTENTS. . Introduction. Main Geographical Features of the Area. . Description of the Ranges. . Work of Previous Observers, . Geology of the Stirling Ranges (Lithology). . Summary of Lithological Characters. . Structural Features. . Summary of Structural Features. DCoNI ATP WD | . Age of the Stirling Range Series. —_ (=) . Physiography. 11. Earth Movement. 12. Summary of Conclusions. Introduction. In spite of their comparative accessibility and their very striking appearance the Stirling Ranges have not received very much attention from geologists. No traces of economic deposits have been encountered. The soil is of the poorest description, water supply is almost non-existent and prickly scrub is extraordinarily dense. Hence there is no settle- ment in the Ranges, and there is nothing to warrant official geological examination. | My thanks are due to the late H. P. Woodward, Hsq., - Acting Government Geologist of Western Australia in the early part of 1914, for allowing me the use ofa certain 80 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. amount of departmental outfit to enable me to carry out the investigation whose results are described in this paper. Main Geographical Features of the Area. The Stirling Ranges form a unique feature in the geology of Western Australia. The Ranges proper extend from a point some two miles east of Oranbrook on the Great Southern Railway in a general east-south-easterly direc- tion for 44 miles, and terminate with extraordinary abrupt- ness just to the east of Hllen Peak (about Lat. 34° 20'S. Long. 118° 19’ EH.) They lie 42 miles north of Albany. The mountains rise abruptly from level plains, mostly ‘sand plains,’ which, with an average altitude of about 900 feet above sea-level, stretch far and wide in almost every direction. To the north, as far as the eye can reach, even from the highest summits, these plains continue without interruption. To the west, at a distance of seven miles west-south-west from Cranbrook, there is an isolated sugar- loaf hill, Warriup Hill, which, though separated both geographically and geologically from the main mass of the Stirlings, is, nevertheless an outlier of the peculiar form- ation which builds up the main range. Seventeen miles to the south, and facing the Stirlings across the broad sand plain through which flows the Kalgan River, lie the Porongrups, a range roughly parallel to, and nearly as rugged as their northern neighbours, but absolutely distinct in geological structure. Like the Stirlings, the Porongrups lie chiefly to the east of the Great Southern Railway, but Mount Barker and one or two other outlying minor summits of the range extend westwards beyond the line. There is, however, no considerable extent of high land in this direction. From the high peaks at the western end of the Stirling Range can be distinguished a number of very distant summits lying in the region of the Lower — GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 8] Frankland River. These, however, can scarcely be regarded as belonging to the same physiographic unit as the Stirling Range. Much more closely related, though still very distant to the east-south-east and south, are a series of sub-parallel but isolated ranges and hill groups. The most northerly of these includes the Mount Barren Ranges south-west of Ravensthorpe. These lie somewhat to the north of the axis of the Stirling Range. To the east of the Porongrups lie the highlands of Cape Riche. Still further south are the highlands of the Albany—Mount Gardiner Mount Many Peak group. TN, RAVENS THORPE ® | eae OR ne KOO Scie q.MT BARREN “3 nn X c “Rhee G3 9 Fig. 1. General locality map oa the relation of the Stirling Range to the Porongrups and to the Frankland-Gordon and Pallinup River Systems. F—August 4, 1920. 3 82 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. These various hill groups are, as above mentioned, roughly parallel, and they indicate the existence of a very well defined tectonic axis running in a general east and west direction. Traces of this same axis are abundant in the South West Division of the State, in spite of the strong dominance of the more recent and much better defined. meridional axis. I venture to suggest the name “Stirling Axis’’ for the former structure line and ‘Darling Axis”’ for the latter. To the north of the Stirling Range the plain above men- tioned is simply crowded with salt lakes of all shapes and sizes. From the high peaks of the range they can be counted literally by the score, their white and glistening surfaces being in marked contrast to the sombre dwarfed vegetation of the sand plain. The zone over which these extend is approximately twenty miles wide from east to west. On the southern side of the range, and between it and the Kalgan River, there stretches a line of salt lakes, quite distinct in many ways from those to the north. The depressions in this system occur singly, and instead of being distributed promiscuously as appears to be the case with their northern brethren, they are arranged in a roughly linear fashion and sweep round the eastern extremity of the range in a curve leading to the Pallinup River. Description of the Range. The range is not a continuous crest throughout its entire extent. At the eastern end the hills do form a continuous and almost impenetrable rampart from which rise a number of imposing summits. 'Tothe west of Coyanarup, however, the continuous hill feature becomes much lower, and, throughout the western half of the area, the continuity of the highlands is very much broken up. Numerous lofty peaks rise irregularly and abruptly from a comparatively . ’ ; : i GEOLOGICAL KECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 83 level surface, and deep “‘bays’’ of plain country penetrate far into the heart of the range. Several broad ‘“‘ passes,”’ whose floors rise very little above the level of the “sand plain,’’ traverse the range completely, and afford a very easy passage across the mountain area. Towards the east the range is fairly narrow from north to south. The southern escarpment is a most striking feature, running in almost a straight line bearing about west-south-west, that is, obliquely to the general axis of the range, and cutting it off to a point at its eastern extremity. There are practically no foot hills along this portion of the southern face, which, from Hllen Peak to Bluff Knoll and the unnamed peak which I have called oh Wedge” on the map, rises precipitously from the plains. The highest points lie in this eastern section of the range, ) and, for Western Australia, their altitudes are very con- siderable. Bluff Knoll reaches 3690 feet and Hllen Peak 3420 feet,! while Pyungoorup and Coyanarup are very little, if at all lower. The northern face of the eastern group conforms to the general trend of the range, that is about west-north-west. It is mostly precipitous, though not perhaps quite as bold as is the southern scarp. Only one of the main peaks, namely Pyungoorup possesses any very considerable foot- hills, though there is a zone of extremely rugged country right along the face. Pyungoorup, however, has a long buttress in the form of a major spur running for several miles into the plains in a north-westerly direction. _ The depression west of Coyanarup, while low as compared with the ridge to the eastwards, is, nevertheless, a com- plete barrier between the plains on the northern and southern Sides, respectively, of the range. The first of the *“passes’’ lies to the west of Yungermere, between that + Lands Department Lithograph, No. 445/80. 84 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. peak and Warrungup. From the southern plains a wide ‘““bay’’ sweeps inwards to the foot of Toolbrunup, the culminating peak of the western group, and this bay is met by another from the north extending between Yungermere and Warrungup. So completely is the range severed by this pass that the highest point reached by the road is only - 200 feet above the plains on either side, and the gradients throughout are extremely gradual.* Another complete pass runs to the west of the towering mass of Toolbrunup, and emerges near the 30 mile post on the road along the northern flank of the mountains. This is spoken of locally as ‘‘Toll’s Pass.’’ A wide bay of lowland runs in a south- easterly direction from Yetemerup Spring (twenty-three miles from Cranbrook on the northern road) into Toll’s Pass at a point south-west of Toolbrunup. A similar bay of lowland extends in a north-westerly direction from the southern plains towards the Abbey, the two bays being separated by a considerable ridge. Of the peaks in the western section of the range only one, Toolbrunup, approaches the altitude of the summits — of the eastern mass. This magnificent peak reaches 3341 feet, and, rising as it does in solitary grandeur from the almost level plains at its feet, it is one of the most con- spicuous and characteristic features of the entire range. In this western section of the chain the isolation of the principal summits, and the extremely abrupt transition from plains to mountains accentuate the differences of level, and the peaks make the most of their height. After Toolbrunup, Warrungup with a height of 2768 feet, Mon- durup a great hog-backed ridge rising to 2831 feet, Magog, Barnett, and Donelly are the most striking individual peaks of the western section. 1 On the Lands Department Map No. 445/80, this is called simply “‘The Pass,” but local residents claim that this is a mistake. The pass should. be called Chester’s Pass, while the route so named on the lithograph should be Hassell’s Pass. : 4 ; ; GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES, 85 The Work of Previous Observers. A bibliography is not attempted here, as it is obtainable in Bulletin No. 61 of the Western Australian Geological Survey, p. 203. A summary of previously published obser- vations is given by Maitland* and by Jutson.® The Stirling Range is also referred to by David.* The principal points to be noted in these descriptions are: A Paleozoic age has been assumed for the rocks of the area though no fossils have ever been found. The metamorphic rocks to the north and south are regarded as older than the sediments of the mountains themselves. On the northern side of the range deposits of brown coal have been proved by boring. Gregory refers to the Stirling Range as the western end of the southern scarp of the plateau, but, as Jutson points out, the range is inno sense a scarp. Actually the scarp is much further south, beyond the Porongrups. Maitland suggests that the Stirling Range is tectonically connected with the Collie senkungsfeld to the west. David shows the rocks of the Stirling Range as occupying a trough fault in the older metamorphic series and is inclined to follow Maitland in connecting them structurally with Collie. Jutson, after reviewing the various possible explanations of the structure, rejects as improbable either trough faulting or the formation of a horst, and suggests that the hills are due simply to erosion andare of the nature of a monadnock. + Maitland, A. Gibb.—Address on some problems of Western Australian Geology. Pres. Address to the Roy. Soc. W.A., 11th July, 1916, Perth, 17. + Jutson, J. T.—An outline of the physiographical geology (physio- graphy) of Western Australia. Bull. Geol. Survey, W.A., No. 61, p. 158. 3 David, T. W. E.—Geology Section, Federal Handbook on Australia. British Association for the Advancement of Science 1914, p. 260. 86 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. The views of the last two authors are merely of the nature of suggestions as neither has had the opportunity of examin- ing the area personally. Jutson and Simpson’ have called the Tertiary Marine Beds of Albany, tbe ‘‘ Plantagenet Series.’’ These beds are recognizable in the area under consideration and occur — abundantly on the Kalgan River. Patches of them can be seen right up to the foot of the Stirling Range itself. Geology of the Stirling Ranges (Lithology). Geologically the mountains are of extreme interest and importance. The great bulk of the south-western portion of Western Australia is composed of crystalline rocks; granites in great variety, gneiss, greenstone, (including chiefly quartz-dolerite and epidiorite), and acid and basic crystalline schists. Comparatively few areas of unaltered or little altered sediments occur. The mountains are built up of a series of undoubted sediments amongst which quartzite and slaty shale pre- dominate. No limestones are known and conglomerates are extremely rare. The base of the formation is nowhere exposed, the contacts with the crystalline formation being either igneous or faulted. For the most part the sediments lie in horizontal or very gently dipping layers, but, locally, steep dips are exhibited and sharp folds and overfolds are not wanting. EHvidence will be adduced to indicate that heavy normal faulting and subordinate overthrusting have occurred. The portion of the formation which is exposed is certainly not less than 3000 feet. The quartzites and slates alternate very regularly through- out the entire series, though there is a slight preponderance of the former at lower levels and of the latter at higher ! Jutson, J. T. and Simpson, E. S.—Notes on the geology and physio- graphy of Albany. Proc. Roy. Soc. W.A., Vol. 11, 1915-16, pp. 45— 58. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF 'THE STIRLING RANGES, 87 levels. The predominant colour is purplish or liver coloured, though greys and blues are also quite common. For the most part the quartzites are fine in texture and extremely tough, and show very little trace of metamorphism. The slates in many places approximate to the condition of shales, so little are they altered. Very seldom is secondary cleavage, transverse to the original bedding, developed; but minute examination usually showsa very fine puckering, and an incipient development of mica which is sufficient to distinguish the rock as a slate rather than a shale. Over the greater part of the area this characteristic of very slight alteration is to be observed. Locally, however, a much greater degree of recrystallisation has occurred, and, in places, the rocks are intensely metamorphosed. This is very notably the case along the southern margin of the eastern section of the ranges. As above noted this margin runs in a strikingly rectilinear manner from near the mountain indicated as “‘The Wedge”’ to Ellen Peak and Andrew Hill at the eastern extremity of the range; and, througbout its entire extent, presents a very steep face towards the southern plains. This fact alone indicates the probability of the occurrence of a fault plane, and other evidence in favour of this supposition will be adduced below. At the Wedge the most intense alteration seen by me occurs. The liver coloured quartzites of the rest of the range are represented by thorough quartz schists, while the interbedded slates have been converted into corrugated mica schists. At Hllen Peak the degree of alteration is less, but, even here, is sufficiently intense to have con- ‘verted the slate into phyllite with wavy structure and silvery lustre. Here, the finer textured beds predominate though they are interbedded with quartzite which has not been altered, as at the Wedge, into quartz schist. The whole series at this point is, however, very much veined 88 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. with white quartz mostly in sheets under an inch in thickness. In Bluff Knoll the quartzites are beautifully ripple-marked and show current bedding. The latter structure dips almost due east. The quartzite beds here are very little altered, but the finer sediments are almost completely recrystallised. — The quartzites are somewhat in excess of the phyllites. As in Ellen Peak, there is much quartz veining. Amongst the foothills to the west of Coyanarup the same charac- teristics are encountered. The veining of the rocks with white quartz is even more pronounced than it is on top of Bluff Knoll. In Yungermere we have the same association of quartzites and phyllites. The former are very little altered, and are current bedded and ripple marked. The latter are silky and minutely puckered. In the cliff just below the summit of this peak, the alternation of coarse and fine beds is very rapid so that the structure becomes very thinly laminated. The quartzites are very strongly jointed, and, where they occur in massive beds as they do towards the western foot of the mountain, it becomes extremely difficult to distinguish between tbis structure and the dip of the beds. The amount of quartz injection here, though still considerable, is less than that noted further east. | In the hill abouta mile 8.S.E. of Moingup Spring in ‘The Pass’ the same general features are encountered, though the quartzites preponderate. Current-bedding witha south easterly dip is distinguishable, and the quartz veinlets are quite saccharoidal, instead of being vitreous as they usually are. In the upper portions of Warrungup the rocks are | mainly much puckered phyllites, sandy in places, with bands of strongly current-bedded quartzites up to 18 inches in thickness. Quartz veining is still a notable feature, though it is less abundantly developed than in the rocks further to the east. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 89 In the lower slopes of Mount Hassell, fine, hard, purple quartzite predominates. In the upper portions of this conical hill, phyllitic layers become more pronounced, but, throughout, the quartzites are very considerably in excess. Ourrent-bedding is very pronounced and ripple marking is exquisitely developed. These ripples are all of the asym- metrical type,! with small amplitude (about half an inch). In numerous instances the small intermediate ridges mentioned by Kindle are beautifully shown. Such ripple marks undoubtedly indicate the action of strong currents in very shallow water. At the western end of Princess Royal Harbour, Albany, ripple marks in fine sand formed by waves witha wave length of about three feet and an amplitude of about six inches, and in water not more than from four to six inches deep, appeared exactly similar to those in question. The phyllites interbedded with these ripple marked quartzites rarely exceed four inches in thickness. They are much more slaty in character than those described above from the eastern peaks. They are smooth and not puckered, and, although shiny and lustrous on the bedding planes, do not show nearly so much development of mica as do those of Ellen’s Peak, etc. The beds of phyllite are oiten considerably ruptured, and, near the summit, there isa band of quartzite through which are scattered, irregu- larly and not very abundantly, rounded and angular frag- ments of phyllite. This structure recalls very strongly the occurrence of disrupted shaly blocks in the Hawkesbury Sandstone of New South Wales, and, in conjunction with the marked development of false bedding and ripple marks, suggests that the Stirling Range Beds, like the Hawkesbury Sandstones are estuarine in origin. The rocks of the * Kindle, E. M.—A comparison of the Cambrian and Ordovician ripple sae found at Ottawa Canada. Journal of Geology, Vol. xxir, 1914, p. 703 - 713. : 90 W. G. WOULNOUGH. magnificent peak of Toolbrunup are very similar to those just described. Here again quartzites are considerably more abundant than phyllites. Ripple marking and false bedding are very pronounced. To the south-east of the main peak, and on the opposite side of the gorge the dip of the current beds is south 29° east at 24°. _ Near the 26 mile post on the northern road there is a mass of pink vitreous quartzite differing very much in appearance from the normal quartzites of the range. This outcrop lies at the extreme northerly limit of the foothills and just on the edge of the plains. In its isolated position its relationships are not very clear. In general appearance, however, it is somewhat similar to one of the rocks at the Slate Quarry (to be described later), which occur under such conditions as to leave no doubt as to their formation as a result of contact metamorphism of the Stirling Range quartzite by the granite. While the evidence is not at all conclusive, the occurrence in question suggests the possi- bility of an igneous contact at the 26 mile post. Amongst the rocks which form the very rugged summit of Talyuberlup phyllite and quartzite occur in about equal proportions. ‘The former are very wavy and even the quartzites are gently undulating. While ripple marks can be traced in the latter rocks, they are by no means so pronounced as in some of the outcrops further to the east. False bedding, however, is just as well defined, the laminge dipping south 18° west at 35’, a direction very markedly different from the general trend of the inclination in other cases. The rocks are very much injected by lenses of quartz, mostly of very small size, very few of which exceed three feet in length. In the foothills immediately to the south the rocks appear to be mostly phyllitic with only occasional quartzite bands. The southern summit of Mount Magog is composed chiefly of quartzite which is perfectly ripple marked. | | GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES, 9] The great hog-backed ridge of Mondurup is built up chiefly of quartzite which is strongly ripple marked and false bedded. There has been very considerable disturbance of stratification in this area, and one reading of the inclination of the current laminze about half way up the slope gave a dip of 42° tothe south east. The strong probability is that this: does not represent, in amount at all events, the angle of repose of the unconsolidated sediment. The Cranbrook road traverses the extreme northern foot- hills of the range for the greater part of its length, and consequently runs chiefly over the sediments of the range or their products of weathering. At four and a half miles from Cranbrook, however, the sedimentary series is left, and thenceforth the road passes over eruptive rocks. The nature of the junction at this point was not determined by me, but probably this locality would yield valuable inform- ation as a result of careful investigation. From Tenterden for a distance of five and a half miles due east along the Lunt Road, plentiful exposures of normal granites and greenstones are encountered. The contact of these with the sedimentary rocks of the range is very clearly defined in the immediate neighbourhood of the Slate Quarry on Loc. 2772. At the timeof my visit the country had been swept clean by an immense bush fire, so that a very satisfactory section was exposed. Theactual contact is at a point an eighth of a mile west of the quarry. It is sharply defined and trends north 33° west. At the im- mediate point of contact the granite is intensely acid, and passes into the slates in the form of vein-quartz loaded with partially to almost completely digested and assimilated fragments of jasper. The contact is a transgressive one. As above mentioned, to the west of the slate quarry, slates are in juxtaposition with the plutonic rock, further to the south-east quartzites stand in a similar relationship, and 92 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. have suffered induration. At a distance of about twenty yards from the contact the slates have been converted into a thoroughly recrystallised hornstone, a type of alteration completely distinct from the regional metamorphism iuto phyllites which occurs to such a large extent in the eastern section of the range. In the slate quarry, two hundred yards from the contact, the rocks are lustrous purple slates with a very perfect cleavage striking 23° west of north, and therefore nearly parallel to the general trend of the junction line. This cleavage stands vertically; cross joints dip north 28° west at 50°. Ata point ten chains south- west of the quarry a tongue of quartz-porphyry intrudes the quartzite. There is thus no shadow of doubt as to the relative ages of, at all events some of the granites, and the - Stirling Range Series. Considering the great frequency of basic dykes through the gneissic granite in the areas surrounding the Stirling Ranges, the scarcity of such dykes cutting the sediments is conspicuous. Throughout the length and breadth of the range only one basic dyke was definitely located. There is one of very considerable magnitude (about 18 feet wide), which crosses the ridge of Toolbrunup immediately to the west of the highest summit and gives rise to the depression which separates this peak from the western summit. The steep talus slope which forms the best means of access to the summit is composed toa notable extent of material from this dyke. While the presence of the eruptive rock can be traced from a distance on both slopes of Toolbrunup by reason of the brighter colour of the vegetation growing on it, no indication of its continuation was noted on the plains either to the north or the south. The rock of this dyke is rather coarse grained ophitic quartz-dolerite in which a good deal of the pyroxene has been altered to fibrous green uralite. It is therefore of a type which is extremely wide spread in Western Australia. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 93, On the eastern side of the summit of Ellen Peak is a deep narrow grassy cleft about twelve feet wide, which cuts through the rocks of the summit with the precision of a knife edge. It bears 70° east of north. No eruptive rock was seen, and the structure may be due to the widening of a joint fissure. Its general appearance, however, is very strongly suggestive of the cavity left by complete weather- ing of a basic dyke though no “ white trap’’ was noticed. In the summit of Bluff Knoll there is a somewhat similar cleft bearing 10° west of north, which is suggestive of a dyke fissure. Here again, however, no trace of eruptive rock was encountered. While, then, it is clearly evident that the granite of Tenterden is younger than the Stirling Range Beds, it would appear that the gneissic granites and their associated basic dykes are, with few exceptions, older. Summary of Lithological Characters. The sediments are quartzites and slates with a slight tendency for the former to predominate towards the base and for the latter to be in excess at higher levels. The sediments are not intensely altered for the most part: the quartzites have suffered scarcely at all, while the slates have been more profoundly metamorphosed. The extreme is reached in “‘The Wedge”’ where quartz-schists and mica- schists are developed. In general, alteration is greater in the southern and eastern areas. In the former section most of the slates have been converted into wavy phyllites and considerable quartz injection has occurred. No trace of fossils has been detected in spite of repeated and assidu- ous search. At the western end the sediments are intruded by granite, and at Toolbunup one considerable dyke of quartz-dolerite was noted. Occurrence of Laterite.—That ubiquitous formation in Western Australia, “‘laterite,’’ is very scantily developed in the area under consideration. The Darling Peneplain 94 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. is practically completely covered with this material at an average level of 800 to 1000 feet above sea level. The peneplain surface in the neighbourhood of Mount Barker (829 feet) is no exception to the rule, and the same feature is carried almost to the Kalgan River on the road to the ranges. On the sand plain to the south-west, south and east of the highlands patches of laterite are left uncovered. at intervals, and evidently the normal peneplain conditions extend over these areas. Immediately on entering the Ranges the laterite is lost and we traverse the outcrops of the Stirling Range Series. At almost the highest point of each of the “ passes,’’ how- ever, laterite again puts in an appearance, and spreads out in sheets to the flanks of the hills on either side. On the Slopes of Yungermere on the east, and of Warrungup on the west of “‘The Pass” the altitude of the laterite is about 1250 feet above sea level (aneroid). In Hassell’s Pass approximately the same relation exists but the altitude was not determined. This difference in level is very suggestive of a slight, though decided, “‘post-plateau”’ movement. Structural Features. Woodward! describes the ranges as being folded into a series of anticlines and synclines at the western end, while at the eastern end the rocks are nearly horizontal. The most striking feature of the geological structure of the area is the almost horizontal bedding which prevails throughout the entire series. For the most part the rocks are bent into extremely gentle folds. In these the dips are readily discernible when the great precipitous faces are observed from a little distance, but are so small that the inclination of the bedding planes is so masked by the + Woodward, H. P.—Annual General Report of the Government — Geologist fur the year 1890, Perth, By Authority1891. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 95 slight irregularities of the surface as not to be measurable by clinometer on the rock exposures themselves. Deter- minations of dip are obtainable with certainty only on the slopes and summits of the peaks where extensive rock outcrops occur in situ. On the foothills and lowlands the rocks are so much broken and covered by angular rubble that it is extremely difficult, and often impossible, to determine with certainty whether what is apparently a dip surface is a true dip, current bedding, jointing or local superficial disturbance. The extreme density of the scrub is also a factor which renders the measurement of a con- tinuous geological section impossible in the course ofa reconnaissance like the present investigation, While the general horizontality of the stratification is so outstanding a feature, there are, nevertheless, abundant and very striking exceptions to the general rule. Where dips were measured with certainty they are indicated on the map. Broadly, there is a very decided tendency for southerly dips on the northern side of the range and for northerly. ones on the southern side, so that the structure, as a whole, is markedly synclinal. In Hllen Peak the stratification is practically horizontal. In the peaks of the five summits of Isongerup the same structure is exhibited. In Pyungoorup there is a general southerly dip of about 10°. Bluff Knoll and Coyanarup are seen from a little distance to possess a gentle synclinal structure. At closer quarters this apparent regularity is found to be subject to local disturbances. In the mag- nificent precipice on the northern side of the range at Coyanarup the dip of the ripple marked quartzite is south 30° east. at 25°, and, in the lower parts of the cliff, the bedding is highly contorted, with a strong suggestion of overfolding towards the north. In thelow gapin the crest of the range near by the ripple marked surfaces are hori- zontal. . 96 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. In the small but very conspicuous hill shown on the map herewith as ‘‘ West Knoll,”’ the dip is south 15° east at 35°, and the shape of the hill is very plainly influenced by its structure, since there is a steep scarp towards the north and along dip slope towards the south. This dip slope falls in a gentle curve towards the axis of the range and then rises equally gradually towards the summit of “The Wedge.’ This hill is almost the mirror image of West Knoll possessing a precipitous scarp on the south and a dip Slope on the north. Curiously enough these two very con- spicuous hills, which show the synclinal structure of the range in a very striking manner are not indicated on the Lands Department lithograph (No. 445). On the summit of the Wedge the dip of the quartz schists is north 10° east at 49°. A little further to the south-west, on the lower slopes, the dip is about vertical, if not actually slightly overturned and inclined to the south at a very high angle. In the western foothills of this peak, a dip of south 10° east at 28° was recorded in very much metamorphosed rocks. The arrangement of the main beds of quartz schist as seen in the western profile of the Wedge is very strongly sug- gestive of the existence of a small normal fault throwing in a southerly direction. It is obvious then that the structure of this very remarkable hill calls for much more detailed investigation than I was able to give it. Olose to the junction of the two roads immediately south of the entrance to The Pass, and just where the last out- crops of quartzite are seen near the beginning of the sand plain, the sediments appear to have a very persistent strike in a direction north 70° east, with a nearly vertical dip. As above noted, dip readings on the lowlands are very uncertain and unsatisfactory. In this case, however, the position, line of strike and apparent dip all conform so closely with the structure of The Wedge and with the remarkable south-eastern escarpment of the range that the ~ ; | ; ’ GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 97 Measurement is worthy of more attention than would otherwise be the case. Taking all these facts into con- sideration there seems to bea very strong probability of the escarpment in question being due toa heavy fault throwing northwards, that is, inwards towards the range. In the hill about a mile and a half south of Moingup Spring the highly jointed ripple marked quartzites dip at very gentle angles to the south-south-east. This fact is very definitely established by the relationship of outcrop to contour, though, on superficial observation, one would be inclined to determine the dip as being steep towards the south-east. It is probable in this case that the apparent north-east to south-west strike is due to local alteration of the quartzite by secondary silicification along a joint plane running in that direction. -In the lower slopes of Yungermere the dip of the quartzite bands is south 30° east at from 30° to 35°. Higher up in the overhanging cliff just below the summit it is south 40° east at 47°... This local abnormality of dip does not seem to conform with any others in the vicinity, and is probably due to a fault or sharp flexure running transversely through the range. It is worthy of note that this ridge is the ‘eastern boundary of The Pass, and, though it is suggested below that The Pass is an erosion feature, it is quite likely that the erosion has been influenced by this structural line of weakness. Just below the eastern summit of Warrungup the beds show a dip of south 30° east at 5°. The dip is slightly irregular and rolling, but is everywhere very small in amount. Several remarkable structural features are exhibited in the fine cliff sections of this peak. In one place, very clearly defined contemporaneous erosion of one of the thin quartzite beds is shown. This is illustrated to scale in fig. 2. G—August 4, 1920, 98 W. G. WOULNOUGH. Fig. 2. Sketch (to scale) showing contemporaneous erosion : near the summit of Warrungup. In another place the beds are very much step-faulted. The phyllites have given way by regular rock flowage, with development of a decided cleavage, but the thin quartzite layers have fractured more sharply and show evidence of distinct, though minute, overthrust faulting. Such an occurrence is illustrated in fig. 3. QUARTZITE SS Fig. 3. Sketch (to scale) showing overthrusting and injection by quartz: near the summit of Warrungup. In another place a more extensive movement has developed incipient crush conglomerate, the thin quartzite layers being shattered into fragments, which, more or less rounded by attrition, are embedded in a ground mass of crumpled phyllite. This zone is about twenty yards wide, and, like the small fault of fig. 3, shows evidence of a . GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 99 powerful overthrusting force from south to north. In some instances the slip-faulting produces a pseudo-ripple-marking on the rock surfaces. This, however, is easily distinguish- able from true ripple-marking which is also extensively developed in the same beds. Sometimes cases may be found where the primary and secondary irregularities are shown in a single specimen, producing a decidedly complicated structure. Mount Hassell shows fine rock exposures at its summit. Some of these exhibit perhaps the most beautifully pre- served ripple marks in the district. On the spot their dip is inappreciable, but from Toolbrunup a general east-north- easterly inclination can be detected. On the lower slopes suggestions of steep and irregular dips are probably to be explained as due to jointing, induration or slip, though they may be connected with the disturbance which pro- duced the steep dips in Yungermere. In the “‘cock’s-comb’’ ridge of Toolbrunup there is a decided synclinal structure; though the dips are all very slight there is an inclination towards the central peak from each side. Towards the end of the south-western ridge there is a good deal of contortion and dips of 45° towards the central ridge are to be observed. There is probably a fault hereabouts. In the long spur south of Toolbrunup and separated from it by a deep gorge, dips, which may be those of false bedded layers, tend south 20° east at 24°. At the summit of this ridge where it joins the transverse spur which connects it with main mountain, the dip of the ripple marked surface, and therefore undoubtedly the true dip, is north 17° east at 44°. One hundred yards to the north- west the dip is north 39° west at 69°, less than a quarter of a mile away towards the south, the inclination is about south south-east and amounts to not more than 8°. There is therefore a very decided plane of disturbance at this 100 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. point, the axis of which is roughly parallel to the disturb- ance forming the south-east scarp of the range. It is practically certain that the disturbance is a fault throwing to the north, but no data are to hand to determine the magnitude of the displacement. From the summit of the ridge the zone of disturbance can be traced very clearly down the western slopes of Toolbrunup into the depths of Toll’s Pass separating that peak from Talyuberlup and Magog. In the rocky summit of Talyuberlup the beds are decidedly wavy in structure. Just below the culminating cliff a dip of south 8° west at 12° was recorded, while on the summit itself, the dip is in the same general direction but extremely gentle. From the summit a most interesting field for investigation can be seen immediately to the south. I was unable to visit it, but could detect the presence of a considerable disturbance in the hillimmediately south-west. of Talyuberlup, where there appears to be a very sharp: anticline. The north-western beds dip in that direction at approximately 40°, while on the other limb of the fold the dip is south-easterly at about 30°. The structure must be merely local or else must have a steep pitch towards the south-west, as the rocks in the next ridge to the south do not appear to be affected. The view obtained by me was. not altogether satisfactory, as it was raining at the time, and there is just a possibility that what I took to be an anticline was really the intersection of a bed, dipping steeply towards the north-east, with the convex contours. of the hill, but I strongly favour the first alternative. It is worthy of note that this disturbed area is very nearly on the line of strike of the fault plane postulated to the south of Toolbrunup. In the cave under the summit of Talyuberlup consider- able disturbance, in the nature of sheet faulting of the beds, can be seen. This has given rise to overthrusts of GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 101 the quartzite layers from west to east to the extent of about three feet, and has caused a cleavage in the phyllites dipping east at 27°. On the southern flank of Magog the dip of the ripple marked quartzite is east 30° south at 15°. In the southern peak of the twin summits the inclination is in the same direction, but with angles up to 30°. The rapid steepening of the dip at this point suggests either a very sharp anticline or more probably another line of fault transverse to the axis of the range. If this exists, it is probable that the low depression west of Magog, and The Pass have both been determined by transverse lines of weakness.. In the summit portion of Peak Barnett the beds appear to dip a little west of north at about 20° (estimated from a distance). The low north-western outliers of the range, near which the road passes, all seem to have slight scarps towards the north with long gentle dip slopes towards the south. In the neighbourhood of Mondurup there is an area of very considerable disturbance. About half way between Redgum Spring and the mountain the ripple marked quartzite dips south 19° west at 19°. On the .western slope of Mondurup itself the dip is south 35° east at 17°. About half way up the slope there is a very conspicuous outcrop in which the dip is due south at 44°. Still higher up tremendous contortion of the quartzite is to be noted. In the western summit of the ridge, where the heavy quartzite beds are exquisitely ripple marked, the dip is south 17° west at 48°. In the saddle slightly to the south- east of this summit there is a local twist giving rise toa strike trending north 72° east with a vertical dip. On the whole then, the rocks of this mountain exhibit moderately steep inclination in a general southerly direction. The main axis of the great hog-back which forms the mountain 102 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. bears south 37 degrees east, so that the structures do not. conform at all closely to the mountain axis, and, in some cases, cut almost perpendicularly across it. In a strongly wedge-shaped foot-hill to the south-south-west of the trigonometrical station, a precipitous scarp to the north and a rather steep dip slope to the south indicate that the southerly dip persists beyond the limits of the main ridge. The continuation of the same structure can be seen ina high peak to the south-east of Mondurup. In Ross Peak the summit rocks, which are beautifully ripple marked, dip north 5° west at 12°, which structure is reflected in the precipitous southern face and gently sloping northern side of the peak. As seen from Ross Peak, the rocks in Peak Donelly appear to have very much the same inclination, but Peak Donelly is by no means a rocky summit. At the Slate Quarry the cleaved slates dip north 49° west at 17. At a point so close to the intrusive contact, however, it is quite probable that the dip has suffered considerable local variation. Summary of Structural Features. It is obvious that the data obtained concerning dips, etc., are far too scattered and scanty to determine in any detail the structure of the Stirling Ranges. Several important. features are nevertheless outstanding. In the first place the strong predominance of nearly horizontal stratification: is most remarkable. I have noted the most important. departures from horizontality actually observed in my journey, and their recapitulation above may lead to an erroneous idea as to the amount of contortion present. Where no statements are made, it may be assumed that the beds are essentially level. Such a mass of level bedded sediments, consisting of alternate layers of hard, jointed quartzites, and of relatively soft slates and phyllites, con- stitutes an almost ideally weak structure from the point oe a7 GEOLOGIVAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 103 of view of denudational forces, an aspect which will be treated later, Transversely the Range is essentially a broad syncline. On the south-eastern escarpment there is almost certainly evidence of heavy faulting, and there is almost equally strong probability of a similar fault on the northern border, so that the area may be described as a trough-faulted syncline. In at least one instance, namely west of Tool- brunup, there is evidence of a fault line well within the range, in the same general direction as the faults above postulated. In the western section of the range the structures noted from Mondurup to Ross Peak indicate an anticline rather than asyncline. Transverse faults, or folds, or both, are suggested by the structures of Yungermere and Magog respectively. In several places the results of compression are clearly defined, and similar phenomena may be inferred with some certainty elsewhere. The overthrust faulting from south to north, with Tormation of crush conglomerate, on Warrungup, and the easterly directed overthrusts on Talyuberlup are the most definite cases. Age of the Stirling Range Series. When examined superficially and compared with geological features in Hastern Australia, the dominance of horizontal Stratification and apparently insignificant metamorphism strongly suggest that the beds are not very ancient, cer- tainly not older than Paleozoic. When, however, the area is more closely studied it is found that very considerable disturbances of stratification have occurred, including overthrusting and formation of crush conglomerates, and that the rocks are much more profoundly altered than one would at first suppose. In fact, considering the general 104 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. horizontality of the strata, the amount of recrystallization of the finer sediments is really remarkable. A very careful search for fossils has not, so far, revealed any trace of organic remains. Many estuarine deposits are singularly barren of fossils, as, for instance, the Hawkesbury Series of New South Wales, so that the absence of such remains cannot be taken as certain proof of greatage. Theabsence of fossils is nevertheless remarkable if the beds are as recentas Paleozoic. It has beenshown above that granite has intruded the Stirling Range Series at the western end of the area, so that the granite is very definitely the younger formation. So faras the author has been able to ascertain by reference to the literature, and from personal enquiries and investigations, there is no record, within the western half of Australia, of injection of granites into formations whose age can be referred with certainty to any portion of the Lower Paleozoic. Pre-Cambrian granites occur over enormous areas and are injected very freely into the later members of the Pre-Cambrian sedimentary formations, for instance into the Barossian Series of the Mount Lofty Range of South Australia, the schistose rocks of Yorke’s Peninsula, the metalliferous slates and schists of the Northern Territory, and the Warrawoona and Mosquito Creek Series of northern Western Australia. On the other hand in the Lower Cambrian Katherine River Series of the Northern Territory, the Lower Cambrian beds of the Kim- berly Division of Western Australia, and the Nullagine Series of the Pilbara Goldfield of Western Australia granitic jatrusions are conspicuous by their absence. The age of the Nullagine Series is undetermined through lack of fossil evidence, but there is strong presumption that it is not later than Devonian nor older than Cambrian, so that, so far as it goes, the evidence is concordant. With considerable hesitation I therefore suggest, as a tentative generalisation, the probability of the Pre-Cam- - \ f. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 105 brian age of all the granites in Australia west of a line joining Adelaide to Cloncurry. If this suggestion can be verified it is obvious that the Stirling Range Series must belong to some part, probably the later portion, of the Pre-Cambrian. While I am pre- pared to admit that the evidence from my suggested generalisation is by no means conclusive, I consider that the lithological character of the sediments, and the absence of fossils are presumptive evidence in favour of great antiquity of the beds. In connection with the lithological features the fact must be borne in mind that south-western Western Australia is an immense granite ‘“‘shield,’’ and that it appears to have suffered no orogenic disturbance since extremely early geological times. The nearest Paleozoic sediments to the Stirling Ranges, namely the Permo-Carboniferous coal-measures of Collie and of the Irwin River, and the associated marine beds in the latter area, are largely unconsolidated sands and clays. The —eontrast between them and the homotaxial beds of Hastern Australia is most striking. While a comparison between the crystalline schists of South Australia and the Stirling Range Series no doubt suggests the comparative youthful- ness of the latter, a comparison with the rocks of the Collie Coal Measures leads to exactly the opposite conclusion, In my opinion the latter comparison is much the more logical of the two, since it is obvious that Post Cambrian orogenic movements on a grand scale have affected the South Australian area. A very strong lithological resemblance exists between the rocks of the Stirling Range and the Roper River Beds and Mount McMinn Beds of the Northern Territory.! The reddish or purplish colour of the beds (suggesting aridity _* Woolnough, W.G. Report on the Geology of the Northern Territory. Bulletin cf the Northern Territory, No. 4, (1918). 106 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. of climate) the textures of the sediments, the prevalence and character of ripple marks and the degree of folding are similar in-the two cases. The accounts given by Maitland? in his Presidential Address to the Royal Society of Western Australia, and in various publications of the Geological Survey of Western Australia suggest very forcibly that the Nullagine Formation of this State is to be correlated with the Katherine and Roper River Beds of the Northern Territory. While lithological resemblance in widely separated areas is very misleadIng, the possibility of a correlation of the Stirling Range Series with the two formations above men- tioned must be considered. Physiography. The general geographical features of the Stirling Range and of the surrounding area described above call for more detailed consideration. The courses of the streams which take their rise to the north of the range are highly inter- . esting. ‘To the north-east the Pallinup or Salt River runs ~ in a general south-easterly direction from a point not far from Gnowangerup, on the Ongerup branch railway line. It runs into the Southern Ocean near Bremer Bay. The major tributaries of this stream all enter the left bank, and only a few minor creeks appear to fall into the stream from ‘the other side. It appears as though the major tributaries just referred to must originally have been the main streams of the district, and at one time these streams probably flowed in a general southerly direction into the Southern Ocean east of Albany. The main stream of the Pallinup is certainly of much later origin, and has beheaded and captured the pre-existing water courses. While the 1 Maitland, A.Gibb. Address on some problems of Western Australian Geology. Pres. Add. to the Roy. Soc. of W.A., 11th July, 1916, Perth, 1917, p. 23. — GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 107 Pallinup River does not run strictly parallel with the general axis of the Stirling Range, it is extremely probable that the river course was brought into existence as a result of the faulting which produced the range itself, and that the river is therefore of the nature of a diverted stream, and not as supposed by Jutson,* due to purely erosional forces. Much more definite and instructive is the case of the Gordon-Frankland River System. The Gordon rises just west of Broome Hill and runs southwards about parallel to the Great Southern Railway to within a couple of miles of Cranbrook. Here it suddenly turns off at right angles and flows to the west-north-west in which direction it con- tinues for 25 miles (direct measurement) until it reaches the valley of the Frankland River into which it falls at right angles. The cause of the deflection is the influence of the axis of elevation of the Stirling Range. The higher peaks of the range extend only to the railway line, and the country tothe west isnot perceptibly uplifted. It consists. of the normal crystalline rocks of the area, with the one exception of Warriup Hill about 10 miles west of Cranbrook. This isolated sugarloaf consists? of an outlier of the Stirling Range Beds, and is built up of the same purplish ripple- marked quartzites asthe main range. Inspite of the com- paratively insignificant altitude of the country, the eleva- tion in this area has been of such a character, and has taken place at such arate as to cause the complete deflec- tion of the drainage. On the northern bank of the Gordon, in its east and west portion heavy aggradation has taken place, a feature which is conspicuously absent on the southern side.” Both Pallinup and Gordon Rivers are therefore diverted streams. * Jutson, J.T. Bulletin Geological Survey of Western Australia, No. 61. p. 160. * Fide M. Aurousseau (private communication). * Fide W. K. Weller, (private communication). 108 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. Between these main streams the country to the north of the Stirling Range forms an area of internal drainage. Its characteristics and the extraordinary abundance of salt lakes have been described above, The intersection of the range itself by broad valleys has also been mentioned. Taking these two facts together, the origin of the entire structure may be understood. The following probably represents fairly accurately the sequence of events. Originally there flowed across the low-lying peneplain from north to south a number of subparallel streams, each entering the Southern Ocean, which extended far north of its present limits, by an independent mouth. Uplift of the Stirling Range commenced, and proceeded so slowly at first as to permit the streams to keep their channels not only cut to base-level, but fairly mature as well. Under such conditions laterite was formed over the lowlands, including the valleys through the range. After the latter had attained almost its full altitude above the plains, a sudden sharp movement completed the differential elevation and the streams were cut off and ‘‘beheaded.’’* It is extremely probable that the climate of the whole of Australia was undergoing a gradual desiccation while these changes were in progress. Be that as it may, it is certain that the rainfall of the area was no longer sufficient to enable the smaller streams to emulate their more powerful neighbours the Gordon and Pallinup, and “ turn the flanks”’ of the range. It is worthy of note that the area thickly covered by salt lakes extends as far east as The Pass; that is, the salt lake area faces that portion of the range which is traversed by deep valleys. East of Warrungup the salt lakes cease to be conspicuous, and, coincidently, the highlands of the range become continuous. Inall probability there was an ' Vide suggestion of faulting of laterlite level. GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. 109 interval here between the original stream valleys. Possibly there was a low divide running in a north and south direc- tion and separating the smaller streams from the valley of the Pallinup. At what period in the history above out- lined the uplift of the peneplain occurred is by no means certain. It seems clear that it was after the trenching of the range by the streams and it is likely that the sudden beheading of them may have been brought about during the major period of uplift of the plateau. The relation of the Porongrups to the earth movements above postulated has not been examined. It is worthy of note however, that, like the Stirlings, these mountains present continuous summits in their eastern portion, and isolated hills separated by broad. valleys in the western portion. This strongly suggests that, though entirely dis- tinct in every detail of geological structure, the two parallel mountain ranges have had a very similar plhysio- graphic history. If the above outline is correct in its main features, the beheaded remnants of what were formerly much more extensive river systems are to be recognised in such streams as the King, Kalgan and Hay. The Kalgan River calls for some description. Its upper valley lies between the Stirling and Porongrup Ranges and the river flows in a general east-south-easterly direction until, rounding the eastern flank of the Porongrups, it turns. southwards and falls into Oyster Harbour near Albany. On the above described physiographic hypothesis the upper portion has been brought into existence at a comparatively recent date. Within the broad valley part, of which is. occupied by the Upper Kalgan, are a number of lakes, some of which atallevents are moderately permanent. At first sight their linear arrangement suggests that they represent. the remnants of a stream which formerly flowed round the eastern end of the Stirling Range and emptied into the 110 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. Pallinup. While this is a possible explanation, it seems more probable that the lakes represent the expiring efforts of a number of small creeks, heading in the Stirling Range, to extend across the sand plain and reach the Kalgan or the Pallinup. Originally they may have been successful, but as the climate has become progressively drier, their waters have failed to extend beyond the limits of the foot- hills. This latter explanation is very strongly suggested by the character of the gully crossing the old road south of Sandalwood Station, which contains the quite consider- able creek rising on the northern side of Hllen Peak. Earth Movement. While the sketch of the physiography may explain some of the later earth movements of the region, the complete history of these movements is undoubtedly highly com- plicated. It is obvious from the structure of the range that it must be regarded as a well defined narrow sen- kungsfeld bounded on the north and south by faults, and as such it is indicated in the handbook prepared for the Australasian Meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of Science in 1914. The preservation of the sedimentary series in such a narrow zone could have been accomplished in no other way. The present altitude of the sedimentary series above the plain is, however, more difficult to account for. Differential erosion seems quite inadequate as an expianation. The alternation of brittle, highly-jointed quartzites, and of relatively soft slaty beds in almost horizontal layers yields a structure which is almost ideally weak. It seems incon- ceivable that such a structure could have withstood the agents of denudation so much better than the massive granites and gneisses, ribbed with greenstones, which form the plains, as to have produced mountains over 2000 feet high by simple differential erosion. The presence of the GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE OF THE STIRLING RANGES. Tia Stich Q Ro Qe bt Eda he Meee St {XS i—~ --"1S Kae << if ee i ee eet | Plateau &! J -———~_ Ns Sta Sgr pee Rea ae - : 3 J 5 pe RP gh j Fig. 4, Fig. 5, | Figures 4 and 5 indicate, diagrammatically, the tectonic history of the Stirling Range. Before peneplanation the sediments had dropped into a “senkungsfeld.” This was bounded by reversed faults, since overthrusting was contemporaneous with quartz injec- tion, and therefore, probably, Pre-Cambrian. During the uplift of the peneplain, and its conversion into a plateau, the formations on both sides of the fault moved upwards. The sedimentary series, however, underwent greater uplift; so that the granite areas are relatively depressed. In this way the faults, originally reversed become normal after rejuvenation. Compression and overthrusting are characteristic of late Pre- Cambrian time, while tension and normal faulting were associated with Cainozoic epeirogenic movements, Porongrups is also opposed to such an explanation, and the peculiarities of river development indicate that something more than passive resistance to erosion must be postulated. It seems probable, then, that the fault planes which origin- ally let down the substance area at some very distant geological epoch, and so preserved the weak sedimentary masses in the trough, became planes of weakness again in more recent times, and, when the plateau area of Western Australia commenced that long series of upward move- ments which culminated in the development of the Darling Plateau, the Stirling Ranges and the Porongrups were thrust upwards faster than the rest of the area, and, what was formerly a senkungsfeld has now become a horst. 112 W. G. WOOLNOUGH. The abrupt termination of both Stirlings and Porongrups on the east indicates that the zone of movement has been limited in that direction by a fault which originally had a downthrow to the west, but which has since taken its part in the relative uplift of both ranges. Summary of Conclusions. The Stirling Ranges consist of a mass of ripple-marked and current bedded quartzites alternating with fine-grained slates possessing for the most part almost horizontal strati- fication. Locally, very considerable crumpling, sometimes associated with overthrusting has occurred. On the north, south and east the Stirling Range Series is probably faulted heavily, and comes into contact with older gneissic granites and greenstones. On the west the contact is an igneous one, the granites being more recent than the sediments. For this reason it is believed that the age of the sedimentary series may be Pre-Cambrian. While the sediments must have been preserved from denudation in a senkungsfeld, it is probable that the latest differential movement has resulted in the uplift of the sediments. Inthis movement extensive rearrangement of drainage systems has occurred. The Pallinup and Gordon rivers are explained as diverted streams, while an area of internal drainage has been formed to the north of the Stirling Ranges. The great “‘passes’’ through the range are regarded as “‘air gaps’’ produced by stream erosion during the penultimate period of the earth movement. ES a er - : 7 + ‘ Plate VT. SANDALWOOD STN“ C71 Camping Res? (* L_| Good wafer ‘ “i Me NYY R\\ Uy SS Ae AS PYUN vA ZEW Ga oe \ (SONG Si Sos =<. SSO ~~. ue 8 { f vr md . \ As | ‘ie f pret, ' a * Php a Ty 6, A, ‘ i’, 7 Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. L1V., 1920. Plate VI. 7 SANDALWOOD STN“ -7 Cam, ampin Rest? LI ater ‘ WY, WANA NNW Wi all i } W/) a vy ) iN y|\I} A Wd NTANIIN VANTIN IN et His {SoHE WEDGE TOPOCRAPHIC MAP STIRLING RANCE VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 113 THH VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NHEPHAN RIVER. By G. D. OSBORNE, Deas-Thomson Scholar in Geology (1919) University of Sydney. (Communicated by Professor T. W. Edgeworth David.) With Plate VII. [Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, September 1, 1920. | CONTENTS. Part 1. GENERAL. _ Introduction. General Geology—Relation of the Neck to the Tectonics of the Area. Physiography—(a) Local, (6) Regional. Part IT. Perroroey. The Breccia. . Inclusions within the Breccia. . The Intrusive Basalt. Dykes and Plugs. . Inclusions in the Dyke No. 1. . Relation between the Basalt and Xenoliths. 6. Comparison with the Dundas Rocks. Part UE. Summary and Acknowledgements. Ol me Ww bD eS Explanation of Plate. | Part I. General. “The Basin’ is the name given to the locality at the junction of the Warragamba and Nepean Rivers, twelve miles south of Penrith. In this area there occurs a vol- canic neck which in the following pages, will be designated the “Basin” neck. Similar in general features to many of the Post-Triassic pipes in the Sydney-Blue Mountain dis- H—September 1, 1920. | 114 G. D. OSBORNE. trict, this neck has been known to Sydney geologists for many years.. On the ‘Geological Sketch Map of tlie Country in the Vicinity of Sydney,’’ issued by Mr. Pittman in 1904, it is shown, but incompletely as regards extent. This portion of the map, was taken from a sketch map by Mr. R.N. Dart, B.E., who, visiting the neck in 1903, was only able, at the time, to map portion of it.+ The Basin neck has been referred to several times in geological literature, namely, by Benson,” Mawson and Taylor,* and Woolnough.* Also the record of a chemical analysis of a diallage rock from the Basin, made by Mr. J.C. H. Mingaye, is given ina Mines Department publi- cation.’ The chief interest attaching to the Basin neck is the occurrence of xenoliths, mostly of igneous rock. These are included in both breccia and basalt, chiefly in the latter. In the basalt only cognate xenoliths occur. This and similar occurrences in New South Wales of basic and ultrabasic xenoliths in generally less basic igneous rocks are matters of more than passing petrographical interest. Some have been treated in more or less detail by Profs. David and Benson, Mr. Sussmilch and others. ° As far as we know all our examples of Tertiary ultrabasic rocks occur as xenoliths. The mass of picrite within the dolerite in Jellore Creek, Mittagong, seems from the details given in the paper by Taylor and Mawson’ to be an example, 2 Verbal communication from Mr. Dart. 2 (a) Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 44, p. 548. (6) P.L.S., N.S.W., 1914, p. 452-3. $ Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 37, p. 349. * «N.S. Wales Historical, Physiographical and Economics,” p. 92. 5 Ann. Rept. Mines Dept., N.S.W., 1908, p. 174. ° For detail of references see Benson, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol. 44, pp. 496, 548. 7 Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1903, p. 826, and fig. 8. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 115 on a large scale, of the result of the intratelluric differenti- ation, which is evidenced at Dundas and elsewhere. The present paper is based on observations made in 1919, and is intended mainly as a contribution to our petro- graphical knowledge of these interesting occurrences in the Sydney district. It is very probable that a more complete suite of inclus- ions exists than is described below, as the outcrop of the dyke containing the xenoliths is very small and decomposed. General Geology. A geological sketch map of the neck and the surrounding country is giveninfig. 1. The neck presents an elongated shape in plan, being about one and three-quarter miles long, and about twelve chains in mean width. The maximum width does not exceed thirty chains. The general trend of the vent is EH. 18° N. At its surface outcrop it is intrusive almost entirely into Hawkesbury sandstone. The definite relations of the igneous rock to the surrounding sediments at the eastern end of the neck are somewhat obscured by the recent alluvium of the Nepean and also by the fact that the soils derived from the breccia, the Wianamatta shales and the river alluvium are similar in appearance, but the neck probably breaks through the Wianamatta shales. The filling of the neck is composed almost wholly of a dark greenish breccia, and within this there are blocks which, though termed “‘inclusions,’’ are identical with certain fragments in the fine-grained matrix, and thus have distinc- tion in size only. Onthe other hand both foreign and cognate fragments occur within the breccia. Kxamples of the former comprise blocks of quartzite - ranging in size up to several feet in diameter. Judged by their general felspathic residuum they are probably meta- CREEL SEP ; 116 : 3 G. D. OSBORNE. -—= 74 50N j Mpeanebosiien 2S cers: | 30 GHAING 20 10 Dd) TOCENE | YKES AGGE RATE ) lattev seete Ex, ¢ ene! + J Recents Preis [X_@ basa D Fig, 1, fees | Hawkespury Ce ee A nevent Giaavers (UTM Beeces VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 17 morphosed Hawkesbury sandstone. In some of the less altered sandstone fragments examples of ‘* injection breccia’’ have been observed: along the bedding planes the breccia has been forced giving a characteristic appear- ance. The foreign and cognate inclusions comprise peridotites, rhyolitic rocks, granitic representatives and a calcareous sedimentary rock of decided Mesozoic facies. These types will be described in Part II. Another interesting occur- rence in the breccia is that of a large mass of coal-like material, which appears to be the cindered remains of a tree-trunk. Similar occurrences at Hornsby are invariably associated with aragonite and silica. At the Basin smoky calcite is associated with this coaly material. The breccia has been intruded by at least three dykes and an irregular mass of basalt. These are shown diagram- matically on the map (Fig. 1). The dykes are numbered on the map, and their respective features are tabulated below:— Dyke. | Strike. eit Wines) eo Amount. Direction. OSI ei No. 1/8. 424° E. ait W.422°S8.| 2 ft. abundant. | No. 2| E. 334°S.| 80° (2) |S. 334° W.] 5 ft. 6in.| absent. _| No. 3 | E. 262° S. | Indeterminate. 1 ft. 4 in | absent. Dyke No. 1 has sent out an offshoot intruding the adjacent breccia in a joint plane parallel to the parent dyke. Ithas also produced a sympathetic set of joints in the breccia parallel to itself. Relation of the neck to the tectonics of the area.—From the map it will be seen that the vent breaks through the Hawkesbury rocks close to and even at the axis of the monoclinal fold. The sandstone is dipping at 32° in a general easterly direction at the eastern end of the neck. 118 G. D. OSBORNE. One of the striking facts which the geologist realises, when investigating the post-Mesozoic history of the Sydney area (part of a larger geological unit), is the genetic rela- tionship existing between the Glenbrook fold, with its accompanying geosynclinal development, and the Tertiary vulcanicity of the area. | The volcanic neck at the Basin, in common with many other necks in the district, was one of the manifestations of this volcanic activity which followed or perhaps in part accompanied the epeirogenic movements. The elongated nature of the vent was mentioned in the early portion of the paper, aud a careful consideration of the facts observed leads the writer to conclude that the east-west orientation of the vent has in general been determined by the existence of a dominant fissure which formed a weak structure and along which explosive action was concentrated. | Such fissures do exist in folded regions, running at right angles to the fold axes, and along them in areas where the folding has been intense dislocation and faulting often occur. In most cases there is a transverse drag between the two portions of the folded block with the production of horizontal slickensides. Suess’ has described such move- ments in detail. In the case in question, the monoclinal folding, due to differential epeirogenic uplift, has been gentle and the zone of fissuring represents the expression of only the initial stages of the development which is exhibited in more intensely folded regions. That the postulated fissure crosses the fold is shown by the occurrence of breccia to the east of the monoclinal flexure. Another contributing factor in the location of the vent has been the probable existence of a zone of weakness _? Suess, ** Das Anlitz der Erde,” Sollas, Trans. Vol. 1, pp. 115-118. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 119 lying to the west of Norton’s Basin, trending meridionally and representing the southward continuation* of the sen- kungsfeld structure which exists west of Kurrajong. The location of the Springwood, Huroka Creek, and Mountain ' Lagoon’ volcanic necks also points to a local genetic con- nection with some such zone of weakness. Speaking of the intimate relation between the epeirogeny and the vulcanicity mentioned above, Dr. Jensen says, ‘“‘The extrusion (and intrusion, G.D.O.) of basalt, may be here, as elsewhere, a phase, function or effect of a senkungsfeld formation.’’* To the author the last suggestion seems the correct one. Physiography. (a) Local.—The purely local physiographic detail can be described ina few words. The neck has been considerably eroded leaving a large area of excavation, accomplished mostly by the Nepean River. This stream flows within the neck for about half a mile of its course, and part of its northern bank is formed by a precipitous scarp which represents approximately the junction of sandstone and breccia. Norton’s Basin is a deep pool of water, with an average depth of fifty feet, and has been produced by the scooping action of the Nepean on the soft breccia. (b) Regional,—Briefly a few points may be mentioned with regard to the relation of the position of the neck to broader problems of physiography in the surrounding dis- trict. Onthe heights adjacent to the Basin fairly extensive + A preliminary examination by the writer of the section from Emu Plains to the Basin resulted in the observation of westerly dips on the sandstone over a considerable distance, suggesting a continuance of the western limb of the Glenbrook anticline. ? Prof. David, Ann. Add. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 1896, p. 59. * Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., Vol..xit, 1911, p. 257. 120 G. D. OSBORNE. deposits of river gravel occur. Here it might be noted that the deposits on the southern side of the Basin extend some distance to the south. (On the map these gravels are only indicated, with no suggestion of extent.) Further other river gravels occur near the Wallacia Bridge, quite close to the Nepean, but comprising rocks which are not — found in the present drainage area of this river. The curious bends taken by the Nepean River froin the Wallacia Bridge to its confluence with the Warragamba are suggestive of river capture and the present junction of © the two rivers is within the Basin neck. These facts make it clear that the Basin neck, composed of comparatively soft material, has, on account of its location, formed an important unit in the latest stages of the evolution of the Nepean- Warragamba river systems during the Cainozoic Hra. Part II. Petrology. 1. The Breccia.—The agglomerate has a fairly uniform grainsize of about ‘3 mm. Dark in colour, it weathers to a greenish-grey., Under the microscope it is seen to Consist of quartz and acid plagioclase grains, and fragments of sandstone and chert. These constituents are cemented together by a base in which chloritic and kaolinic material preponderate. Calcite as small veins and _ irregular secondary masses also occurs throughout the rock. Only one small fragment of basaltic nature was noted in the slides of the breccia. This was similar to the ‘‘trachytic’”’ basalt of Hornsby. 2. Inclusions within the Breccia. (a) Caleareous Clastic Rocks.—The occurrence of these was mentioned in Part I. In some parts of the neck they are numerous. Microscopic investigation reveals a suite of rocks with variable grain- size, the chief constituents being fragments of lava, chert, grains of quartz, plagioclase, chlorite and au indeterminate | VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 121 brown material. The cementing material is distinctly calcareous. The quartz shows sharp extinction on the whole, but some has been strained. The felspar is acid oligoclase. The fragments of lava comprise basalt and andesite, the latter sometimes glassy. The basalt is hyalopilitic in fabric and much chloritised. The indeter- minate brown individuals seem to suggest ostracod remains but Mr. W.S. Dun expressed the opinion, on looking through the slides, that the material was not of organic origin. Some examples of the rocks under description are extremely fine grained and others very arenaceous in character. Although there is a considerable divergence in some pro- perties, they can be conveniently grouped together. The question of the origin of these numerous inclusions cannot be definitely answered, but there is a similarity between some of the slides and sections of certain horizons in the Narrabeen beds. Those inclusions at the Basin which con- tain fragments of lava, as described above, suggest redis- tributed tufis. Other slides strongly resemble sections kindly lent by Mr. W. L. Havard of an upper horizon of the Wianamatta stage which isassociated with the calcareous rocks of this age at Picton and elsewhere. It is possible that the inclusions in question are derived from the Narra- been stage or represent remnants of a roof of upper Wiana- matta rocks, an obvious extension of those calcareous horizons which covers considerable areas.in the County of Cumberland.* If the latter is in part or wholly correct, then the instance is recalled of the preservation in the vent at Arran Island of blocks of Triassic and Cretaceous Strata, the sole surviving relics of a former series now completely eroded away. (b) Rhyolitic Rocks.—This type of inclusion israre. One specimen was found by the author and a slide of a similar inclusion from the Basin was kindly lent by Mr. G. W. Card. 1 The writer is indebted to Mr. Havard for information as to the extent of these rocks. 122 G. D. OSBORNE. Petrographically the former specimen. is very felsitic witha little flow structure and a few phenocrysts of quartz.. The Survey collection slide is of greater interest. Micro- scopically it consists of quartz and felspar in a crypto- crystalline groundmass which is fluidal in places. This. criterion coupled with its tuffaceous nature is significant as regards origin. Many small devitrified cuspate bodies. and examples of spherulitic aggregates are present. | The quartz phenocrysts are clear and free from strain effects. Partial corrosion has occurred in some cases. A few of the felspar grains have properties suggestive of anorthoclase, but the grains in question are very altered, and hence the point is in doubt, Intergrowth of quartz. and felspar occurs in one or two very small patches in the base. Radial chlorite is also present. As a whole the rock appears very similar to some of the Pokolbin and Currabubula types. It is strongly suggestive of the New South Wales Carboniferous facies. If derived from a Car- boniferous terrane thousands of feet below, a_ possible southward extension of the Kuttung Series as far as Sydney is indicated. | (c) Ultrabasie Plutonic Rocks.—Xenoliths of these rocks are less numerous in the breccia than in the basalt. However the types in both are identical and a detailed description of the specimens in the basalt is given below. The types recognised in the breccia are harzburgite and lherzolite. (d) Granitic Rocks.—A short description of a granite inclusion found at the Basin is given by Prof. Benson.* A similar inclusion has been examined by the present writer, and a comparison of the two slides shows that they are almost identical. In hand specimen the rock in the writer’s collection shows a gneissic appearance, and while generally ’ Proc. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., 1914, p. 453. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 123. under the microscope this structure is due to the orienta- tion of the constituents, still there isa suggestion of grano- blastic structure. This point was noted by Prof. Benson also. The rock may therefore have been derived from a mass in which metamorphism had not progressed very far. The occurrence of granitic rocksin these Tertiary necks is very interesting, in that, as it is improbable that they are derived fragments, they must have been brought from a great depth. Recently Mr. H. Yates, B.Sc., has shown the writer an inclusion of granitic nature from the Hornsby vent, and the possible occurrence of granite in the Mount Gilead neck is to be noted.* 3. Occurrence of Basalt.—Other than the three dykes there is an irregular outcrop of basalt near the eastern end of the neck, (see map). It is almost identical in petrological features with the rock in dyke No. 2, slight textural differ- ences being observed. The Dyke Rocks.-—The general structural features of the dykes are given in a tabular statement in Part [. They are all decomposed and unfit for chemical analysis. (a) Dyke No. 2.—In hand specimen this dyke rock is somewhat amygdaloidal but the body of the rock is ex- tremely dense and compact. Microscopically it appears as a very fine grained groundmass in which are set altered phenocrysts. The phenocrysts are all decomposed and the criteria of form and nature of pseudomorph are the only guides to their original nature. Some of the individuals. have been olivine showing the characteristic macropina- coidal sections, and poorly developed cross-sections of angite can be made out. Calcite and possibly dolomitic material have taken the place of most of the phenocrysts, although some altered olivine shows pseudomorphism by ' M. Morrison, Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Vol. vir, 1904, p. 19. 124 G. D. OSBORNE. calcite, serpentine and quartz in association. In many cases carbonates have probably replaced original hydrous magnesium silicate pseudomorphs after olivine. The base of the rock presents some unique characteristics. Magnetite is abundant and exists as idiomorphic and sub-- idiomorphic octahedra and also as minute needles. The latter are often arranged in radiating groups or in parallel lines. Many of the needles stand perpendicular to the phenocrysts, which were evidently floating about in the magma just prior to complete freezing. At other times the magnetite grains have wrapped round the phenocrysts in coronal fashion. The rest of the base consists of small brown prismatic augites of the second generation and of felspar laths. The augites are fresh and free from iron inclusions, Some grains are simply twinned. The felspar is altered to sericite and chlorite. A careful search failed to reveal the presence of felspathoids or of melilite. The rock is holocrystalline and exhibits glomero-porphyritic structure in places. (b) Dyke No. 3.—This rock is considerably decomposed and is evidently coarser in grainsize than the other dyke rocks. The field presented in the microscope is 60% rhombo- hedral carbonate, but careful examination reveals evidence of the former presence of olivine, augite and felspar. There is a distinct tendency to ophitic fabric. It is clear that the rock was originally an olivine dolcrite or olivine basalt. (c) Dyke No. 1.—This is the most important of the three dykes, in that it is the matrix of the interesting xenoliths, — In hand specimen it has a slaggy appearance and is char- acterised by a large number of small joints. The dyke rock, a basalt, varies mineralogically from point to point. Whether this difference has been contributed to by assimulation of xenolithic material or not, is hard to VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. ~ 125 say. There are however textural changes which are cer- tainly due to the proximity of inclusions. One phase of the basalt consists of small well formed prisms of purple augite which exhibit characteristic transverse cracking and occasional simple-twinning. A little lath-shaped plagioclase felspar (Ab; Am ), with albite twinning, and subordinate ilmenite complete the mineral constitution. In appearance this rock resembles the so-called “‘aphanitic dolerites’”’ of Antarctica.* A more normal phase of the basalt consists essentially of laths of basic labradorite, crystals of green augite and iron ore with a little interstitial glass. A few grains of olivine are also present. ‘This olivine belongs to the rock proper, but other extraneous olivine crystals are seen in the slide. These latter are altered and invariably possess a tiny border of diopside crystals. The arrangement of the constituents of the basalt gives rise to a pseudo-variolitic texture. The rock probably cooled rapidly. 4, Inclusions in Dyke No. 1.—This section of the petro- logy has been studied in most detail and it is proposed to consider the rocks in types, the general description of each type being based on the examination of a number of examples. Therocks will be treated in the following order: Gabbros, Hypersthene Gabbros (Norites), Troctolites, Harzburgites, Lherzolites, Dunites, Pyroxenites and other miscellaneous types. (a) Gabbros.—True gabbros have rarely been met with atthe Basin. Most of the gabbroic rocks are hypersthene- bearing, thus being noritic in character. However, one gabbro has been examined, the component minerals being felspar, augite, magnetite and apatite. The augite shows ‘ W.N. Benson, British Antarctic Expedition 1907-9, Geol. 11, p. 153. 126 G. D. OSBORNE. twinning and inclusion of schiller plates, and in common > with the felspar it is noticeably fresh. The felspar exhibits pericline twinning very well, and has the composition of basic labradorite. (b) Hypersthene Gabbros grading into Norites.—These rocks are very abundant in the suite of inclusions. The component minerals comprise plagioclase 427, augite (some- times diallagic) 38%, hypersthene 147%, and ilmenite 4%, with decomposition products 2%. The structure is gabbroic and the grainsize coarse and even. Some of the felspar plates exceed 3 mm. in diameter. The order of consolidation has been made out as follows:— Iron ore, if primary, early, followed by augite, which was then quickly succeeded by hypersthene. Some of the. augite has been corroded by the still molten felspathic magma, but no corrosion of the rhombic pyroxene is seen, indicating that felspar and hypersthene commenced to crystallise with but little interval between them. The felspar is twinned after the albite and pericline laws, the characteristic wedged-shaped segments in the twinning of gabbroid felspars being seen. The reading for extinction angles measured on the trace of the (001) cleavage in sec- tions parallel to (010) is —24°, indicating an average com- position of Ab, An;. The boundaries between some of the | felspar plates are very ragged and produce very irregular intergranular spaces, in which secondary material has developed. Similar material fills many of the cracks which traverse the mineral. This secondary product has a high birefringence and is probably sericite. There is also some chlorite. Augite varies in degree of development and many small grains are included in the felspar. Pleochroism to a very slight degree is noticed, indicating the existence of a little titanic acid in the pyroxene. The maximum extinction measured is Z /\ c = 44°. Schiller enclosures Eee VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 127 abound in some sections and their development in any one grain is capricious, suggesting a possibility of primary nature.’ Interaction with the residual magma has been mentioned. Between felspar and pyroxene there seems to be chlorite. Alteration to chlorite is very frequent, show- ing that the augite is aluminous. The possibility of the derivation of large masses of iron oxides from the augite has been noticed. The orthorhombic pyroxene is definitely hypersthene, fairly rich in iron. It is pretty abundant and is strongly trichroic with the following scheme:—X, pale reddish- purple; Y, reddish-yellow; Z, greyish-green. Perhaps the most important feature of this mineral generally is the development of the so-called schiller plates. Although some crystals have an absence of schillerisation still the great majority show this phenomenon to different degrees. In particular in one crystal which is figured in Plate VIL, fig. 2, these schiller plates are seen to be developed parallel to three planes. However, the dominant schiller effect is that parallel to (100) with the minor effect in the plane parallel to (010). In the augite the schillerisation is confined in most cases to planes parallel to the orthopinacoid, with examples at times of development in clinopinacoidal planes. The question of the origin of schiller structures is a fascinating one. Prof. Judd* discussed it at some length, and insisted on the secondary nature of the phenomenon, attributing it to deep-seated conditions. He averred that the degree to which this property is developed in rock minerals is in general a function of the depth from the surface. Hssentially Judd’s concept, therefore, was that 1 Cf. Harker, “Tertiary Igneous Rocks of Skye,” p. 109. 1 Q.J.G.S., 1886, p. 382. 128 G. D. OSBORNE. of pressure and resulting solution and deposition. Harker,’ however, in connection with his work on the British Ter- tiary terranes, disagreed with Judd’s view, and hinted at the structure being a primary one. Judd would certainly extend the idea of schillerisation to wide limits, thereby dealing with changes in felspars and olivines. Zirkel,? too, mentions the process in connecticn with the mineral olivine. Without discussing the matter definitely, the opinion may be stated that the occurrence of these inclusions in the Basin rocks is indicative probably of separation from solid solution in the host rather than of infiltration and solvent action. This would not accord with Judd’s view, but would postulate a secondary nature, in that the sepa- ration of the inclusions took place after the actual crystal- lisation of the host. This tentative conclusion is based on the examination of the schillerised minerals, with special reference to their association, to the changes in adjacent felspars,.and tothe occurrence of the rocks containing them. This mode of origin of the dark plates is therefore surely analogous to the secondary perthitisation of alkali-felspar, the albitic element often originally held up in potash- felspars corresponding to the metallic oxides which existed in solid solution in the pyroxene. It would appear that the pyroxene individuals have been, with reference to the metallic constituent, in a labile condition, but while the dominant factor regulating the spontaneous separation of the dark inclusions has been that of decreasing temperature, still in the present study the possibility of pressure aiding inasmall way in their development has been recognised. One rock which is included in this group is of the nature of a hyperite, containing both monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes and much olivine together with a little primary ' Harker, “Tertiary Igneous Rocks of Skye,” p. 109. 2 Zeitschr. der deutsch. Gesell. (1871) p. 189. = 3 , VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 129 ilmenite and felspar of the composition of labradorite, determined by reading the angle between the pericline twinning striation and the trace of the basal cleavage on sections parallel to (010). The olivine is altered to tle reddish mineral iddingsite, and the felspars are sericitised in places. This rock is interesting in being a linking type between hypersthene gabbro, normal gabbro and olivine gabbro. (c) Troctolites.—One of the most interesting features of the work on the Basin material, is the recognition of the presence of the olivine-felspar rock, troctolite, among the inclusions. As far as the writer knows, this is the first time troctolite has been recorded in New South Wales, and although the occurrence is not as an individual rock mass, still it has been deemed of sufficient importance to merit an analysis. In hand specimens the troctolites show the typical spotted appearance produced by the uniform grainsize of the light felspar and dark olivine, characteristic of the Forellenstein of von Lasaulx. A typical portion of the field as seen under the microscope, is shown in Iig. 1, Plate VII. Microscopically the rock is seen to consist of olivine in corroded grains, augite, felspar, a little ilmenite and a granophyric intergrowth of pyroxene and green spinel. The general features of the crystallisation are similar to those of many British Tertiary ultrabasic rocks. Olivine evidently commenced to crystallise before felspar, as the former is sensibly corroded; there is no trace of eutectic (not graphic) consolidation, and although the proportions of the constituents are as follows:—felspar 60%, olivine307%, augite 7%, spinel 1%, ilmenite 2%, still olivine has crystal- lised first and yet could not originally have been in excess. This, therefore, is evidently another example to be ex- plained on the hypothesis which Vogt has assumed, that I—September 1, i¢20. 130 G. D. OSBORNE. the presence in the magma of pyroxene (here augite), which has one ion in common with olivine, has ‘‘accelerated’”’ the- freezing of the latter mineral. This suggested explanation of an apparent anomaly on the theory that rock magmas behave as chemical solutions, has been used by Harker in the interpretation of certain features of the ultrabasic rocks of Rum.* The augite crystallised soon after the olivine and before the felspar, but the augite-pleonaste system was a late product of solidification, being subsequent to the adjacent felspar.’ The felspar is subidiomorphic with stoutish habit, exhibit- ing albite and pericline twinning. Strain is expressed by undulose extinction and peripheral shattering. The alter- ation in cracks and irregular patches has given rise to sericite, chlorite and calcite. The extinction angle in sections parallel to the brachypinacoid give, in different slides, values ranging to bytownite of about the compo- sition AbgAn7. These determinations are in general substantiated by the results of the analysis. Olivine occurs in rounded grains, and in places is com- pletely pseudomorphed by iddingsite and _ bowlingite. Secondary carbonates are also present. The augite is fairly fresh and of a pale greyish-green colour. It is generally concentrated locally and shows incipient alteration to chlorite. Granophyric intergrowth of pyroxene and pleonaste is present, showing the same general features as the similar occurrence at Dundas. An example is figured in Plate VII, fig.6. Dr. Benson® accounted in one way for the inter- growth, by postulating the solution of felspar of a partially solidified gabbroic magma by a peridotitic magma on 1 Harker, “ Natural History of Igneous Rocks,” pp. 170, 171, 205. 2 Benson, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, p. 519, et seq. 3 Penson, loc. cit., p. 521. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 131 admixture of the two, with the production of a syntectic melt, which crystallised as pyroxene and pleonaste grano- phyrically intergrown. In connection with the Basin rocks it must be remembered that felspar crystallised late. Below is placed a chemical analysis of a troctolite from the Basin (A) and with it (B) an analysis of a troctolite from Coverack. (A) (B) Norms. Si0, 46°71 45°73 (A) (B) Al,O, 24:08 22-10 Orthoclase “56 1°67 FeO, “51 ah Albite 20:96 17°13 FeO 4:99 3°51 Nepheline — 2°13 MgO 2°12 11:46 Anorthite 49°76 48-09 CaO 10:01 9:26 Corundum 1:63 a Na,O 2°51 2°54 Diopside _— 7:07 K,O 10 “34 Hypersthene 6:12 — TiO, "26 — Olivine 18:00 18-36 H,O+ 1:22 4-38 I]menite ‘61 =— H,O- 69 Magnetite wae) "93 MnO — 20, — Water cot 4°38 100-47 100:03 100-25 we eis Classification for both rocks +II. 5. 4. 5. Magmatic Name— Hessose. (A) Troctolite from the Basin. Analyst, G.D.O. (B) Troctolite from Coverack, Cornwall. Analyst, F. T. S. Houghton. It will be seen that these rocks are very similar in chemical composition. The Basin rock is more felspathic and the Coverack rock more olivinic. The calculation of the plagioclase felspars gives the following results, assum- ing that in the case of (B) there is available silica to form the polysilicate albite with the disappearance of nepheline: 1 (a) Geol. Mag., 1879, p. 504. (b) Q.J.G.S., p. 906. 182 G. D. OSBORNE. (A) Albite 29°64% Anorthite 70°56% (B): 44° 807887 bi 69°127 The actual composition of the felspar would be slightly different from that given at (A), in that a little lime must be allotted to pyroxene, with the necessary deduction of small amounts of lime and alumina from the anorthite molecule. However, allowing for such a change the com- position of the felspar as determined optically, corresponds closely to the value obtained from the analysis. (d) Harzburgites.—This type of peridotite is by far the — most abundant. Its average mineralogical composition, based on rough estimates of the proportions of the minerals in the slides, is approximately as follows:—olivine. 70%, enstatite 18%, diopside 87, and spinel (picotite) 47. In the following accounts of peridotites the brown spinel will be referred to as picotite. It is not possible to say definitely whether the spinel is picotite or chromite, but the percentage of chromium sesquioxide in two analyses of the Basin rocks is evidently too low to admit of the existence of chromite. The harzburgites are coarsely crystalline and variable in grainsize. The component minerals are very much altered.. Particular attention has been paid to the significance of the decomposition products of olivine, as regards their relation to the conditions of formation. Thus, as Professor Benson’ has clearly explained, the alteration of olivine to serpentine aud to bowlingite represents a dual set of con- ditions, the production of serpentine being effected at great depths, and the changes to bowlingite and iddingsite being wrought by katamorphic agencies. ae Tw ere ey ee ee ee eee ee ee In the harzburgites complete pseudomorphs of olivine by bowlingite do occur as well as mesh-serpentine replace- 1 © Origin of Serpentine,’ Am. Journ. Sci., December 1918, p. 693. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 133 ments. Secondary iron ore in a fine state of division is also present; this is often in the minute veins of carbonate which transverse the grains in all directions. Associated with the bowlingite there is a certain amount of what is probably opal. The serpentine is often fibrous, forming veins in which the fibres stand perpendicular to the vein- walls. The rhombic pyroxene is considerably altered, the chief alteration product being a reddish platy mineral, which is probably iddingsite; bastite is also developed. Associated with the bastite is a mineral which almost pseudomorphs the bastite, and has pleochroism with Z = c, brownish- red, and X = a, yellowish-green. This is thought to be the orthorhombic amphibole anthophyllite. One other decom- position product of obscure derivation, but possibly after enstatite, is a colourless mineral witha high birefringence. This has the appearance of tale or tremolite. The latter might be supposed to have originated by pressure* under deep-seated conditions, evidence of which is to be seen in the occurrence of serpentine, or the mineral may be colour- less anthophyllite, as in some of the Cornwall ultrabasic rocks. The strong birefringence and the absence of pleo- chroism suggest either tale or tremolite, but the actual determination is a matter of difficulty. The diopside is very fresh and contains a few schiller inclusions. Picotite has crystallised in the main during the early stages of solidification, but one very remarkable occurrence of graphic intergrowth of augite and picotite occurs. (See Plate VII, fig. 4). This particular type of structure has not been encounterel by the writer in his research into liter- ature on ultrabasic rocks. ' Cf. Flett and Hill, “The Geology of the Lizard and Meneage,” p. 65. 134 G. D. OSBORNE. (e) Lherzolites.—The lherzolites contain less olivine than the harzburgites, and diopside dominates over ensta- tite. While many features are to be found in this group similar to those investigated in the last group, still one of the most singular changes of olivine occurs in a lherzolite. While bowlingite and serpentine occur with no striking features, a number of grains of olivine show a composite pseudomorph, so to speak. This consists of bowlingite, with bright interference colours, forming fibrous patches or segments partitioning off the olivine grains, serpentine which is sometimes developed at the periphery of the grains or in cracks, and opal with characteristic low D.R.; the opal is always associated with a puzzling brown decompo- sition product of irregular shape. This material is opaque with dark brown to black colour, and in places grades off insensibly into the bowlingite. It preserves the original cracks of the olivine, and in reflected light shows no metallic lustre, and only the merest indications of the common hydrated iron oxides. That it is an altered iron oxide which originally separated anhydrous out in large measure after the manner of alteration of olivines described by Judd and Zirkel, is the only explanation forthcoming at present. This view is strengthened by the existence of opal which is often associated with residual iron oxides in Olivine. A figure of this manner of alteration is given in Plate VII, fig. 5. In contrast to the olivine enstatite is almost unaltered. The (110) cleavage is very well marked and schiller plates are absent, although the rest of the rock expresses the various vicissitudes through which it has passed, comprising the subjection to pressure and conditions in plutonic regions and also circumstances favouring the infiltration of solu- tions in the zone of weathering. Thin bands of fibrous carbonate cross the crystals and a little talc’ is developed * Cf. Kosenbusch, ‘Mikroskopische Physiographie,’ Band I, II, p. 180. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 135 along some of the more pronounced cleavage planes. Among these and other peridotitic rocks the crystallisation of free picotite has been studied carefully, and it is found that no constant period of solidification is indicated. {2) Fig. 2. Crystallisation of Spinel in Peridotites. (a) Late Crystallisation. S picotite, E enstatite, B bowlingite pseudo- morphs after olivine, Au augite. (6) Early Crystallisation of picotite S, in association with E enstatite, Au augite and O altered olivine. Fig. 2 (a) shows the evidence for referring the formation of spinel to a period late in the crystallisation history of the rock. There as elsewhere it is found filling inter- granular spaces and enclosing olivine. However, in many cases picotite has undoubtedly crystallised first, as shown in figure 2 (b). Often, too, corrosion of the spinel is seen and a pretty example occurs of a small reaction rim between picotite and enstatite which is unmistakably com- posed of serpentine, a result which is hard to explain chemically. The peridotites contain excellent examples of cracks developed in unaltered minerals, particularly pyroxene, by pressure exerted upon them by the expansion of adjacent. 136 | G. D. OSBORNE. olivine grains, as a result of alteration to bowlingite and serpentine; one such example, in a rock allied to wehrlite, is figured in text fig. 3. Such structures are common in altered ultrabasic rocks. ! ie) Hoe i a « i BM i: Nai oF Vos ye “/\ Sr, i { E aN \ Aw) \ Ne | Mal Aaa \ NG) IN eX \\\W ( \h y " eB ay Fig. 3. Augite in Lherzolite, showing cracks produced by the expansion consequent upon the change of olivine to serpentine. (f) Dunites.—Dunites are comparatively rare and show no special features. They contain up to 80% of olivine, with very subordinate amounts of enstatite and augite, and always some picotite of early crystallisation. The struc- ture in the slices examined is equigranular.2 The alter- ation of the olivine is mainly to serpentine, and in such cases has been effected in the anamorphic zone. A tolerably fresh specimen was analysed with the follow- ing result (A): beside it is placed an analysis of a dunite from Dundas.°* Cf. Harker, “ Petrology for Students,” p. 90; Teall, British Petro- graphy, Plate viii, fig. 2; Twelvetrees and Pettard, Roy. Soc. ‘Tasmania, 1897, p. 28, 2 Cf. Iddings, “Igneous Rocks,” Vol. 1, p. 195, Vol. 11, p. 321. > W.N. Benson, Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, p. 582, VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 137 Norms. A B A B si0, 41-20 3913 Anorthite 6°39 — ‘Al,O, 2°85 3°48 Olivine 59-89 72°14 Fe,O, 1:67 1:83 Enstatite 23°80 16:02 FeO W223 7°58 Corundum “A 3°48 MgO 38:04 42°15 Magnetite DC 2°60 ‘CaO 1:29 07 Ilmenite = 30 NaO trace = Chromite oeill 7510) K,O absent a Water 3°51 2°88 TiO, trace "16 CO, 3°40 3°05 CO, 3°40 3°05 ———— H,O+ 2°65 2-80 100-09 100:77 H,O- oO, *80 ——— —_—— NiCoO 45 04 MnO 26 oy ~r,0). 24)! -20 100°17 100-75 (A) Dunite from the Basin; Analyst G. D. Osborne. (B) Dunite from Dundas; Analyst W. N. Benson. The correspondence of the two rocks is very evident and is of course to be expected. The Dundas rock is slightly ‘more basic. In the case of (A) lime is higher than in (B), and owing to the presence of CO., most of the lime in the rock must be in the form of calcite, though some of the lime is prob- ably in the pyroxene molecule. The strict calculation of lime as anorthite uses up some alumina which together with the remainder, given norm- atively as corundum, is expressed mineralogically by the augite and possibly picotite. 138 G. D. OSBORNE. (g) Pyroxenites.—No rocks of this type were found by the author but the following is an analysis by Mr. Mingaye’ of a diallage rock from the Basin :— SiO, so. DOB TiO, J ee AsO; ai 2-46 CO.= rt 4-4] Fe,0, an LieeOG Cr,0, gt 04 FeO... 96) San een NiCoO =iee 31 MgO . £0576 MnO oe, -29 CaO... ts 6°25 Bare: af “02 Na,O ay: 155) | — = KO. ae gee 09 100-45 H,O- wis 2-21 ——— H,O+ ee 4:07 (h) Other rock types within the Basalt.—Under this. heading it is desired to mention briefly the nature of three sections of rock material, which contain some most unusual characteristics in their mineral content. Two sections. were Cut froma small inclusion which was associated with gabbro and lherzolite in a closely packed portion of the dyke. Under the microscope both sections show very Similar features. Fortunately in one slide the junction of the inclusion and its host, the basalt, is presented. The rock consists essentially of two minerals quartz and another colourless mineral, whose characters, if not anomalous,, suggest something fairly rare as a rock constituent. The structure is allotriomorphic granular and the second mineral has included the quartz. However, the quartz does not appear to be normal. The appearance is rather that of recrystallised quartz in most cases, yet its inclusion in the second mineral appears more or less ordinary. The second mineral showsa fine felted or fibrous appear-. ance similar to many secondary silicates after olivine. Against these fibres the extinction is practically parallel. 1 Ann. Rept. Mines Dept. N.S.W., 1908, p. 174. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 139 Some sections, evidently basal, are completely isotropic and the mineral is uniaxial with negative character. The refractive index is lower than that of Canada balsam. It has not been possible yet to examine the mineral separately and determine » and «, but the D.R. measured on a section ‘039 mm. thick was calculated at ‘0045. Sometimes, an apparently homogeneous grain, will, under crossed nicols, exhibit a division into an isotropic central portion anda number of surrounding feebly doubly-refracting areas. * If the above characters are themselves not abnormal, then the data given suggest some such mineral as apo- phyllite or chabazite. The occurrence, however, is not that of crystals lining cavities or cracks as one might expect in the case of such minerals. The mineral in question alters to irregular masses which grade almost imperceptibly into the fresh mineral, these resultant masses showing high birefringence. ‘The effect of pressure on this assemblage of minerals has been to produce a large number of parallel fissures into which secondary solutions have found their way, and now the quartz shows a perfect network filled with a strongly birefringent material which has also a high index of refrac- tion. Many of the quartz fragments have been detached and lie embedded in the basalt. Whether selective assimil- ation was the only factor in effecting this separation is hard to say. There is often developed between the separ- ated crystals of quartz and the compact rock inclusion a vein of bowlingite with its distinctive characteristics. The third section is made up almost entirely of the unknown mineral, which is idiomorphic towards some irregular, more or less rounded areas, now much confused and stained, but suggesting broken down pseudomorphs + Cf., Iddings, ‘* Rock Minerals,” p. 287. 140 G. D. OSBORNE. after some ferromagnesian mineral. The structure of the main mass of colourless mineral is typically subidiomorphic granular under crossed nicols, the junctions between adjacent grains being extremely difficult to discern in ordinary polarised light. It is intended to investigate this mineral further, with possibly the application of micro-chemical or staining tests. At present the actual identity is left asa matter of doubt. To conclude this section the occurrence of xenocrysts of quartz and olivine in the basalt should be noted. The quartz is Clearly foreignin nature. It is sometimes very shattered and cracked, at other times more compact. Sometimes it has the appearance of having been recrystallised. In- variably surrounding the quartz xenocrysts there is a border of tiny diopside crystals. The olivine, which is often decomposed, is of cognate nature, having been derived either from the breaking down of peridotites or by original fractional crystallisation from the ultrabasic magma. Dd. Relations between Host and Inclusions.—In the Dundas papers by Prof. David, Watt, and Smeeth? and Prof. Benson,? attention was drawn to the assimilation effect by the basalt on the xenoliths and its bearing of their rounded form. The former point was also mentioned by Benson in his Gerringong notes.* The Basin inclusions are often well rounded, an effect due in part to magmatic corrosion. Some specimens of basalt with inclusions simulate the appearance of a con- glomerate. The mutual relations of the basalt and inclusions are well shown in some of the slides, and descriptions follow. 1 Of. Lacroix, ‘ Enclaves des Roches Voleaniques,” p. 19, fig. 1. 2 Prof. David, Watt, and Smeeth, Journ. Roy. Soc, N.S. W., 1893, p. 401. 3 W. N. Benson, Journ. Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 1910, p. 542. + P.L.S., N.S.W., 1914, p. 447. VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 141 The expression of a change in the nature of host by absorption of xenolithic material is twofold: (a) textural and (b) mineralogical. The first is conditioned by physical, and the second by both physical and chemical circumstances. Nothing appreciable along the lines of (b) has been effected like the results observed in the Skye rocks, where the chemical compositions of the host and inclusions are anti- thetical. The mild effect of a basaltic magma on basic inclusions as at Dundas and the Basin, and the profound alteration of acid fragments in a similar magma, agree with the view, expressed by Harker, that between magma and xenoliths of like composition, there is a general chemical equilibrium. ! It is taken here that the inclusions at the Basin, with the exception of such fragments as quartz, etc., are fragments cognate with the environing basalt, and are the expression of a phase which differentiated under plutonic conditions. Subsequent transport to higher levels has caused rounding of many of the fragments through corrosion and corrasion.? From microscopic examination it appears that certain processes went on in deeper regions, altering the fragments before they were carried up to their present position. The absorption of the magma here, as at Dundas, has been selective, felspar succumbing much more readily than augite. | The basalt has penetrated intergranular spaces in the xenoliths and especially in those of gabbroic types, showing that the whole of the inclusions were well heated to allow such fine strings of basic material to penetrate so far. Plate VII, fig. 6 shows the manner in which augite is freed by the gradual absorption of felspar. An interesting feature observed was that of a felspar grain adjacent to the magma * A. Harker, “Tertiary Igneous Rocks of Skye,” p. 354. ? «Origin of Dike Inclusions, Journ. of Geol., 1915, p. 169. 142 G. D. OSBORNE. which was partly assimilated in such a way as to produce a flask-shaped area, the neck of the “‘flask’’ being the entrance through which the basalt made its way and the body of the flask representing partially dissolved anorthite. Orystallisation of the host prevented the complete solution of the felspar, and the molten material in the ‘“‘flask”’ solidified as felspathic basalt. The forces of crystallisation probably de-oriented the undissolved felspar a little, with the result that a broad pericline twin striation which was originally continuous across the ‘‘flask’’ area now shows a marked deviation. 6. Comparison with the Dundas Rocks.—In the preced- ing pages the general geological and petrological features have been described in some detail. It is proposed here, briefly, to refer to the Dundas rocks by way of comparison. Through the kindness of Prof. Benson the author has been able to examine personally, his slides of the Dundas and Gerringong inclusions. As one might expect the Basin rocks are essentially similar to those at Dundas. Among the points of distinction between the two sets, we must note the absence of troctolites at Dundas. The felspars of the gabbros at this locality show effects of alteration akin to schillerisation, in Judd’s sense, and secondary twin lamellation, which are not met with at the Basin. The crystallisation of the spinel picotite in the ultra- basic rocks has been different in some of the rocks considered in this paper. The rock analyses show that in the dunites the ratio of the bases to each other and to silica, and the content of the alkalies, lime and the accessory metallic oxides, are fairly constant at both localities. Nickel oxide is perhaps an exception being “41% and °30% respectively in two of the basin rocks, such values being much higher than those in the Dundas rocks. At both localities it would appear that VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 143 certain changes in the differentiates went on in the intra- telluric stage of the crystallisation of the basaltic magma, and ceased on completion of the activity, which is expressed by the basalt plugs and dykes, after the consolidation of which, changes in the minerals of the inclusions took place, which are referable to katamorphic agencies. The granopbhyric intergrowth between pleonaste and monoclinic pyroxene is characteristic of both localities and occurs in gabbroic rocks which are olivine-bearing. The intergrowth of augite and picotite is peculiar to the Basin. Part III. Summary and Acknowledgements. At the Basin, Nepean River, there occurs a volcanic neck which evidences at least two stages in its past activity. The first epoch was one of explosive violence when a fine-grained breccia consisting mainly of fragments of sedimentary rock was formed. Three dykes and an irregular plug of basalt, which intrude this breccia, form the second phase of vulcanicity. The formation of the neck, with the production of a long narrow vent, has been due to explosive action concentrated upon a weak fissure structure, lying more or less perpendicular to the Hastern Cordillera. There is a genetic relation between the igneous activity and the earth movements of late Tertiary times. The Basin neck has formed an important unit in the physiographic evolution of the Nepean- Warragamba system during Cainozoic times. The breccia consists of fragments of quartz, plagioclase, chert, quartzite cemented by chloritic and kaolinic material. It is hard tosay whether the two dykes and plug of basalt, which do not contain xenoliths, on the one hand, and the inclusion-bearing dyke on the other hand, were contem- poraneous or not, because the former may contain inclusions at lower depths, and also since a similar association is to 144 G. D. OSBORNE. be seen in the South Coast area. Certainly under the microscope there is a big textural difference, but chemical comparison is difficult owing to the decomposed state of the rocks. ne | The inclusions in dyke No. 1 have been interpreted on precisely the same lines as those laid down by Dr. Benson for Dundas. These rock types vary from norites right through with decreasing acidity to dunites, including. the rock troctolite, recorded in this State for the first time. The rare association is found of pleonaste and augite in olivine-bearing gabbroid rocks, and also a unique inter- growth of augite and picotite in a harzburgite. The differentiation which produced the phases, later torn up into fragments and carried to higher levels, may have some features directly explicable on Bowen’s theory of differen- tiation by sinking of crystals. The ultrabasic rock types. very probably represent a phase, derived by differentiation in an intercrustal reservoir from a magma, which itself was a differentiation product from an alkaline magma. Amongst the inclusions not cognate in nature, there are examples of gneissic? granite derived from ‘an ancient terrane, and rhyolitic rocks possibly referable to the Carboniferous Volcanics (Kuttung Series) which may prob- ably extend underground as far south as the Basin. A third type is of acertain fragmental calcareous rock which may have been part of an upper Mesozoic unit. Veining the igneous rocks at the Basin there occur satin spar, quartz, calcite and aragonite. Acknowledgements.—In conclusion the writer wishes to © thank those who have helped in matters connected with the preparation of this paper. To Professor David he is indebted for advice on many points, and for constant sympathetic interest. He has profited by discussions with Plate VII. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W., Vol. LIV , 1920. ed >) nee VOLCANIC NECK AT THE BASIN, NEPEAN RIVER. 145 Dr. L. A. Cotton and Prof, W. N. Benson on various points, and through the kindness of the latter was able to examine his slides of the Dundas rocks. To Mr. G. W. Card, A.R.S.M., F.G.S., he acknowledges many kindnesses, and the opportunity of examining material belonging to the Geological Survey. And in particular to Mr. W. R. Browne, B.Sc. for help in petrographical difficul- ties, and for advice generally, his best thanks are due. Finally he wishes to express gratitude to Mr. W. EH. Baines, J.P., a resident of the Basin district, for much kindness extended to him during his visits to the Basin area, EXPLANATION oF Puate VII. Fig. 1. Troctolite, showing relations between felspar and olivine, the latter exhibiting initial alteration. Polarised light x 15. Fig. 2. Crystal of Hypersthene in norite showing the development of “Schiller” inclusions parallel to three planes. Polarised light x 22. Fig. 3. Granophyric intergrowth between green spinel and augite in troctolite. Ordinary light x 86 (high power). Fig. 4. Graphic intergrowth of picotite and pyroxene in harz- burgite. Ordinary light x 31. Fig. 5. Common mode of decomposition after olivine in lherzolite, the products comprising bowlingite = 6, serpentine =s, quartz (chalcedonic?)=qg, and an indeterminate brown substance, the last two being always directly associated. Polarised light x 22. Fig. 6. Section across junction ofa gabbroid xenolith and its host (basalt) showing the manner in which felspar is more readily assimilated than pyroxene by the enclosing magma. Polarised light x 22. J—September 1, 1920. 146 i R. H. CAMBAGE. ACACIA SEEDLINGS, Part VI. By R. H. CAMBAGE, F.L.S. [With Plates VIII - X.] [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, September 1, 1920. ] SYNOPSIS: VITALITY OF SEEDS IN SeA- WATER. TRANSPORT OF SEEDS BY WATER. Twin STEMS. SEQUENCE IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF LEAVES. NUMBER OF PINN& ON ONE LEAF. TRIPINNATE LEAVES. GLANDS OR NECTARIES. FLOWERING SEEDLINGS. FERTILE SEEDS FROM Por PLANTs. DESCRIPTIONS OF SEEDLINGS. Vitality of Seeds in Sea-Water. Seeds of Acacia melanoxylon and A. penninervis var. falciformis from Jenolan Caves germinated when planted after having been immersed in sea-water for 1,192 days or 34 years. Transport of Seeds by Water. When discussing the possible transport of seeds in Part I,’ . it was mentioned that a pod of Acacia Farnesiana, when placed in sea-water, sank in a few days, but that Dr. H. B. Guppy had known pods to float for four or five weeks. Recently a cluster of four fresh pods which had only just ripened was placed in sea-water and floated for ten weeks and then sank. The cluster was then taken out and divided into four, when two pods sank, but two again floated, one for a further thirteen days, or eighty three days in all, and the other for a further nineteen days or eighty nine days in all. 1 This Journal, Vol. xu1x, 93, (1915). AVACIA SEEDLINGS. 147 The likelihood of the wide distribution of this species having been assisted by the transport of seed-pods by ocean currents, though not proved, is much strengthened by the result of this experiment. Twin Stems. Several seeds of Acacia asparagoides from Medlow, and A. vomeriformis from Mount Victoria, produced twin stems which became two separate plants. This feature has previously been recorded in the case of A. juniperina (Part I, 93). Sequence in the Development of Leaves. In Part V, (p. 144), it was pointed out that of 104 species examined, 92 commenced with one simply pinnate leaf, while 12 had an opposite pair. The following three may now be added to those which produce only one pinnate Jeaf, and this brings the number to 95:—A. argentea Maiden, A. Hamiltoniana Maiden, and A. vomeriformis A. Cunn. Number of Pinne on One Leaf. In addition to the records already furnished (Part V, p. 145), relating to the number of pinne on one leaf of a phyllodineous Acacia, the following are now added-—A. rigens, A. cultriformis and A. Hamiltoniana, all of which may have two pairs. to3 mm. broad; rachis 3 to 8 mm., glabrous; stipules 1°5 mm. | Nos. 4 to 6. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole terete, 1 to 2°1 cm., pilose; leaflets three to four pairs; rachis 6 mm. to 1 cm.; stipules 2 mm., pointed. Nos. 7 to 9. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1°2 to2 cm., No. 9 sometimes slightly dilated, with midrib along lower — margin, pilose to hirsute; leaflets three to five pairs; rachis. 7 mm. to 1°3 cm.; stipules 2 mm. No. 10. This may be a phyllode or abruptly bipinnate similar to No. 9, terminal seta 1 mm. Nos. 11 to 20. Phyllodes from obliquely oval-lanceolate to almost triangular in the later ones, much shorter than the petioles of most of the bipinnate leaves, hirsute, midrib not far from lower margin and terminating in a sharp spine, two or three finer nerves above. PLURINERVES—(Microneure). ACACIA STENOPHYLLA A.Cunn. River Cooba of the Lachlan River near Huabalong, Humong of western districts of New South Wales, Goodlay of the Natives.around Garah near Moree (A. W. Bucknell). Seeds from Winton (EK. G. Davies), and Geera (Howard O. Cullen), both near Central Queensland. Pate X, Numbers 4 to 8. Seeds brown, flat, oblong-oval, 6 to 7 mm. long, 4°5 to 5 mm. broad, 1°3 to 2 mm. thick. Hypocotyl terete, pale green, 2°5 to 6'2 cm. long, 1°4 to 2°5 mm. at base, 1to1°5 mm. at apex, spreading intoa flange at the root. Cotyledons sessile, auricled, oval-oblong, 9 mm. to 1°2 em. long, 5 to 6 mm. broad, upperside at first yellowish- — green, becoming rich green, underside creamy to pale green. ay ACACIA SEEDLINGS. 161 Stem terete, green, glabrous. First internode 1 to6mm.; second 2 to 9 mm.; third to sixth 8 mm. to 1°8 cm. Leaves—No. 1. Abruptly pinnate, petiole 4 mm. to 1°2 cm., pale green, glabrous; leaflets four to six pairs, oblong to ovate-oblong, 5mm. to 1 cm. long, 2 to 3°7 mm. broad, upperside green, underside pale green; rachis 8 mm. to 2°5 cm., with terminal seta. No. 2. Usually abruptly bipinnate, petiole 5 mm. to 1°4 em., glabrous, with terminal seta; leaflets two to four pairs, oblong-acuminate, about 5 mm. long, 1°5 to 2°5 mm. broad, midrib distinct; rachis 8 mm. to 1°7 cm.; stipules minute. In one case No. 2 was abruptly pinnate with four pairs of leaflets. In another case the leaf was strictly tripinnate, the basal pair of leaflets having developed as a pair of pinnee, while the terminal pinna had four pairs of leaflets. (Plate X, fig. 8). Nos. 3 to 8. Abruptly bipinnate, petiole 1 to 2°8 cm., becoming slightly dilated, with a strong nerve near the lower margin, glabrous; leaflets four to seven pairs; rachis 7 mm. to 2°4 cm. Nos. 9 to 15. These may be linear phyllodes, or abruptly bipinnate, petiole 2°2 to 4°4 cm., dilated from 1 to 2 mm., with distinct midrib; leaflets four to six pairs; rachis 1°3 to 2°2 cm. Nos. 16 to 38. These may be linear phyllodes, or abruptly bipinnate, petiole 3°1 to 8°2 cm.; leaflets three to eight pairs. In the early phyllodes the midrib is so distinct as to make the leaf appear to be uninerved, though by close inspection a finer vein may be Seen on each side of the central one. No. 20 may be 10 cm. long and 3 mm. broad. K—September 1, 1920, 162 R. H. CAMBAGE. EXPLANATION OF PLATES, Pruate VIII, Acacia trinervata Sieb. 1. Cotyledons and pinnate leaf. Springwood. 2. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and pungent pointed phyllodes. 3. Pod and seeds. Acacia sentis F.v.M. 4. Cotyledons, with pinnate leaf showing. Broken Hill, (E. C. Andrews). 5. Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves, phyllodes and stipules. | 6. Pod and seeds. ) Puate IX, | Acacia flewifolia A. Cunn. 1. Cotyledons, pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaf and phyllodes. Wyalong. | 2. Pod and seeds. Acacia Hamiltoniana Maiden. 3. Cotyledons and tip of pinnate leaf. Leura. 4, Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes. 5. Pod and seeds. Acacia amblygona A. Cunn. 6. Cotyledons and tips of pinnate leaves. Tottenham. 7 . Pinnate leaves, bipinnate leaves, phyllodes and stipules. . Pods and seeds. oe) PLATE X. Acacia accola Maiden and Betche. . Cotyledons and tip of pinnate leaf. Wahroonga. ' Sop LS . Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes. Pod and seeds. (SU) Acacia stenophylla A. Cunn. . Cotyledons. Winton, Queensland, (E. G. Davies), . Pinnate leaf, bipinnate leaves and phyllodes. . Pod and seeds. Geera, Queensland, (H. ©. Cullen). Pod. Garah near Moree, (A. W. Bucknell). . Tripinnate leaf. Winton. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. L1V., 1920. Plate VI11. Acacia trinervata (1l—3); Acacia sentis (4 — 6). Four-fifths Natural Size. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol; L1V., 1920. Plate 1X Acacia flexifolia (1 and 2); A. Hamiltoniana (3 —5), A. amblygona (6 — 8). Four-fifths Natural Size. i" Df bry \ i *. “he , hb age - FP eh, \Ws + \ \ As \ \ & “Gi nn pom yy NS Acacia accola (1 — 3) Two-sevenths Natural Size. Acacia stenophylla (4-8). One-half Natural Size. ON A BOX-TREE FROM NEW SOUTH WALES AND QUEENSLAND. 163 ON A BOX-TREE FROM NEW SOUTH WALES AND QUHENSLAND. By J. H. MAIDEN, I.8.0., F.R.S., F.L.S. [Read before the Royal Society of N.S. Wales, September 1, 1920. } EUCALYPTUS PILLIGAENSIS n. sp. Arbor mediocris, cortice cana &. hemiphloic simile et in trunco ramisque persistente; ligno brunneo, fibris tortuosis; foliis junior- ibus lineari-lanceolatis ca 10 cm. longis et 1°25 cm. latis, utrinque obscuris, venis distinctis sed praeter costam non conspicuis, vena peripherica a margine paullo remota, venis patentibus; foliis maturis angusto-lanceolatis ca 10 cm. longis, 2:5 cm. latis, nitent- ibus vel obscuro-nitentibus utrinque, venis junioribus foliis similibus; alabastris non angularibus, operculo conico, calyce in pedicillum angustato; antheris #. odorate similibus, stigma paullo dilata; fructibus parvis conoideis ad subcylindraceis ca 3 mm. longis in pedicellum paullo longiorem angustatis, pedunculo ca 9 mm.; margine distincta valvis plerumque 4, valde immersis. A medium sized tree. Bark—Whitish-grey like that of EH. hemiphloia, and per- sistent as in that species, on the trunk and main branches. Timber—Brown coloured and interlocked. _ Juvenile leaves—Linear-lanceolate, say 10 cm. (4 inches) long and say 1°25 cm. (4 inch) broad, dull on both sides, venation distinct though not conspicuous, except as regards the midrib. Intramargihal vein a little distant from the edge, venation spreading. Mature leaves—Narrow lanceolate, say 10 cm. (4 inches) long and up to say 2°5 cm, (4 inch) broad, shining or dull- shining (egg-shell lustre) on both sides; venation as in juvenile leaves. 164 J. H. MAIDEN. Buds—Not angular, with conical operculum, the calyx ‘ tapering into the pedicel. Flowers—Anthers very similar to those of H. odorata; — the stigma slightly dilated. Fruits—Small, conoid to subcylindrical, say 3 mm. (4 inch) long, tapering to a pedicel rather exceeding that length, into a common peduncle of 9 mm. (2 inch); rim distinct, valves usually 4, well sunk. This tree has received both attention and neglect, because’ it has been by some looked upon as included in H.Woollsiana R. T. Baker. As I have now no hesitation in saying that it is not included in E. Woollsiana (compare Mr. Baker’s figures of that species), and as I am of opinion that it has not been formally described as a species, I offer it as new. Inasmuch as it is so common in the Pilliga Scrub, New South Wales, that the district may be looked upon asa focus of it, the specific name chosen may be useful. Illustrations.—See Part XI, plate 51, figures 27 — 30 of my ‘*Oritical Revision of the Genus Hucalyptus.”’ See also my ‘“‘Forest Flora of New South Wales,’’ Part XLI, plate 152, figures B and C, for much larger and better figures. These were all drawn from a specimen collected by me at — Narrabri, N.S.W., in November 1899, and form the type. A photo. block of saplings at Gilgandra, N.S.W. (R. H. Oambage) was backed by specimens referable to this new species. All the figures were labelled EH. odorata var. Woollsiana. Synonym. i , E. odorata Behr and Schlecht., var. Woollsiana Maiden, as described at p. 32, Part XI of my “‘Critical Revision.” Range. So far as I know, this species is confined to New South — Wales and Queensland, but we have much to learn in regard to its range in these, and possibly in other States. It is ON A BOX-TREE FROM NEW SOUTH WALES AND QUEENSLAND. 165 represented by the following specimens in the National Herbarium, Sydney. The localities quoted are all in the northern half of New South Wales, extending just into Queensland, the two quoted from that State marching with the northern New South Wales localities. New South Wales.——Mount Boppy (J. L. Boorman, August 1903). Four and a half miles from Coolabah Rail- way Station on the way to the old Experiment Farm (J. L. Boorman and J.H.M.). ‘‘Mallee Box,’’ Moondana, Parish Flinders, Nymagee district (Forest Guard H. F. Rogers). Gilgandra (R. H. Cambage, No. 1135, with photo. of a clump of saplings, already quoted). Large shrub or small tree. Dubbo-Gilgandra road, 18 miles from Dubbo (W. Forsyth, No. 2). ‘‘ Narrow-leaved Box,’’ Coonamble (H. Taylor). Castlereagh River (Revd. Dr. Woolls), (labelled E. largi- florens by Mueller). ‘‘ Narrow-leaved Box.’’ On the plains near Baradine (W. Forsyth, No. 5). Very common in the Pilliga Scrub, as the following specimens will show :— Box, slaty smooth bark on branches. F. Reserve 1263, Ph. Leard, Co. Nandewar; 45 feet high, girth 54 inches {Forest Guard M. H. Simon). “Narrow-leaved Box.’’ Bark greyish in colour and rough on trunk, smooth on limbs and of darkish colour. Height 60 feet, diameter 3 to 4 feet. Wee Waa (Forest Guard T. W. Taylor, No. 14). *“White Box,’’ near Old Wongan Station, Dubbo Creek area (Dr. H. I. Jensen, No. 56). “‘Gum-topped White Box,’’ Cuttabri (J. L. Boorman, Dr. H. I. Jensen, Nos. 2, 19). “Narrowed-leaved Box.” Bay, south of Port Jackson (Julius H. Camfield, December 1897), and Northbridge, North Sydney, north of Port Jack- son, N.S.W.; (James Williams, November 1915; Dr. J. B. Cleland, December, 1915). I name it in honour of John Burton Cleland, M.D., now Professor of Pathology in the University of Adelaide, for many years Principal Microbiologist, Sydney, who first prominently drew my attention to this plant. | Affinities. This species could very easily be (and has been) passed over as a petiolate and more lanceolate leaved form of A. cordifolia, or even as a dwarf form of A. intermedia DC. It seems to me that its affinities are with these species, but nearer the former. A. intermedia and A. Bakeri have rough bark, somewhat resembling the Boxes (e.g. Euca- lyptus hemiphloia F.v.M.). That of A. cordifolia is rough- flaky. In habit A. Clelandi is near A. cordifolia, but smaller in all its parts, less hispid, the inflorescence less corymbose and with the differences between the juvenile and mature leaves more accentuated. | ee eS ——S ee ee ee : : ) | : CALCULATION OF REFRACTIVE INDEX. LV Gr THE CALCULATION OF REFRACTIVE INDEX IN RANDOM SECTIONS OF MINERALS. By Lko A. COTTON, M.A., D.Sc, and MARY M. PEART, B.Sc. [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8. Wales, November 3, 1920. ] Part I.—Principle of the Method. By Dr. Corton. A relatively simple formula has been established for estimating the double refraction of minerals in random sections, the said formula being y — al = (y — a) sin @ sin 6! in which y'—«' is the double refraction sought, y—« is the maximum double refraction of the mineral and @ and @' are the angles which the particular direction of transmission makes with the two optic axes. Such an equation does not, however, furnish the separate values of y' anda’. As it is sometimes desirable to obtain these values other methods must be employed. It is a well known proposition of analytical solid geometry that if the equation of an ellipsoid referred to its principal axes aS co-ordinates be 2 2 a eee HEN ooh AO EGY (1) then the major and minor axes 7, and r, of a given central _ gection of the ellipsoid are given by the roots of the equation l 1 [2 + m? [2+ 1? m+n? Pa? + m?B? + ny? ae ~ B oor ae) rn where 1, m, and are the direction cosines of the normal to the plane of the central section. L—November 3, 1920, One) 178 L. A. COTTON AND M. M. PEART. The roots 7, and r, of equation (2) are given by the theory of equations and may be obtained by solving the two follow- ing equations :— i /? a2 ae m? Sig + n'y? ee a BP ral. LAH aor a eae (3) and il | Foam Pan ne eae a+ + = (eigen y iB? a. Now it is known from the properties of the optical indi- catrix that the two refractive indices of a mineral plate are represented in magnitude by the major and minor axes of the central section of the indicatrix which is parallel to the plane of section of the mineral plate. If therefore, the values a, 6, y are the axes of the indi- catrix and l, m, and m are the direction cosines of the normal to the plane of the mineral section, then the refrac- tive indices y' and a of this particular sectionare givenby the values of 7 and 7, derived from equations (3) and (4). | Now these formule are not nicely adapted for numerical computation and in any case they involve the solution of equations (3) and (4). As an alternative to this rather tedious method the author proposes the following method which is largely graphical in character. . Let «, 6, y as before be the principal refractive indices of the mineral and therefore the principal axes of the — indicatrix. The equation of the indicatrix is therefore as before a Yy z oe geet hee 2 2 2 Let 7, and r, be the refractive indices of a mineral plate the direction cosines of whose normal are l, m, and n. CALCULATION OF "REFRACTIVE INDEX. 179 Then r, and r, will be the major and minor axes of the central section of the indicatrix parallel to the mineral plate. Let the direction cosines of r, and 7, be respectively bh, Mh, 1, and I, M,, Ns. Hence the co-ordinates y, 2, of the extremity of the diameter 7, are given by the equations faerie, De Ser iea Za, Since the point (x, y, 2:) lies on the surface of the indi- catrix the co-ordinates 4 y; 2, must satisfy the equation of the ellipsoid and hence we have l 2 a 2 2 ae ey ees (5) which may be expressed in the form i? m n 1 —, + B + 2 pB ott eeeenaeesenees (6) Thus when 1, 7m, m are known the value 7, is simply cal- culated. Similarly from the equation Eh Miee ss 1S | ee = Be =F ma = ee EUalace slapava thats erator wrote (7) the value r, of the second refractive index can be calculated. The problem therefore, is now resolved into one of find- ing the direction cosines 1], m, m and Iz mz 1. These values may be readily obtained by graphical means. The stereographic projection is employed for this purpose. The general method may be illustrated by a particular case. It was desired to obtain the values for the two refractive indices for a section of labradorite cut parallel to the 010 face. The plane of the stereographic projection is chosen so that it is perpendicular to the direction of section in the mineral plate. 180 - J, A. COTTON AND M. M. PEART. In this case it was possible to take the plane of the ‘stereographic projection so that it was perpendicular to’ the crystallographic axis C, The direction of transmission ‘CP, (Fig. 1) therefore lies in the plane of the projection and is perpendicular to the trace of ae mineral section SCT. See \ SS | : “S s B ee r + O10 + C Wi D( 100 Fig. 1.—Stereographic Projection showing the method of finding the direc of vibration corresponding to the required refractive indices. CALCULATION OF REFRACTIVE INDEX. 181 The data required are given as follows:— The composition corresponded to Ab,An,. The values of the principal refractive indices are known to be a = 1°554, B = 1°558, y = 1°562. The position of the acute bisectrix corresponding to « and of the optic axial plane are given from text books of mineralogy such as Idding’s Rock Minerals. y lies in the optic axial plane at 90° from a; and the direction of £ is given by the pole of the optic axial plane. An amount equal to V (where 2V is the optic axial angle in the mineral) is marked off on each side of « and in the optic axial plane, so that the two points A and B go obtained represent the optic axes. Now according to the Biot-Fresnel law the planes of polarisation bisect the angles between the two planes passing through the direction of transmission and each of the optic axes respectively. If a stereographic net be employed the positions of these planes can be readily determined and hence the planes of polarisation can be drawn, The directions of vibration in the plane of the mineral section are given by the lines of intersection of the planes of polarisation P Z and P Z’* with the plane of the mineral section SCT. Thefpoints Z and ‘Z therefore represent the directions of the vibrations cor- responding to the refractive indices r, and r.. They are, therefore, the directions corresponding =to those radii of the indicatrix which have for their lengths 7, and 7. Hence if we find the direction cosines of r, and r, we may substitute these values in equations (6) and (7) and so determine the required refractive indices. Here again the employment of a stereographic net will enable the angular distance of Z from «a, 8 and y to be easily determined and the cosines of these angles are the 182 L, A. COTTON AND M. M. PEART. required values of mn, Thus r, is determined and a similar process will enable r, to be also evaluated. Where one or more of the direction cosines are closely equal to unity the inaccuracies of the actual measurements on the stereographic net may give rise to sensible inaccu- racies in the results. In order to obviate this difficulty we have recourse to the relation RP+tm +2 = 1 If the sum of lj + mi + nj as obtained from the observed values be not equal to 1, the total should be made equal to one by proportional change in the values of lj, mj and nj, and the corrected values so obtained should be substituted in equation (6) in order to obtain the best value of 7,. ~The method described above is simple in principle though it may appear a little elaborate in detail. The author has however, found this method quite simple in its application and with the aid of a stereographic net the calculations may be quickly executed. He has also found that the principles have been easily grasped by his students who have applied this method in their class work. In practice it has proved very much more satisfactory than the purely analytical method. Part II.—The application of Dr. Cotton’s Method of Calculating Refractive Index to the Felspars. By Miss Mary M. PEART. With variation in the composition of the plagioclase felspars from albite to anorthite there is a gradual increase in refractive index. The various plagioclases might there- fore be discriminated by an accurate determination of the refractive index in some given direction. Curves showing the variation for the maximum and minimum values of the refractive index (« and y) are given in various text books, cf. “‘Idding’s Rock Minerals,’’ but in practice sections containing the « and y are difficult to obtain. P= ‘ ‘whpe CALCULATION OF REFRACTIVE INDEX. 183 Dr. Cotton’s method, however, affords a means of calcu- lating the refractive index in any random direction. In applying this to the plagioclase felspars the directions selected were those paralled to (010) and (001). Such sections are parallel to the two prominent cleavages and may be readily obtained in practice. The data required for the construction of the stereo- grams were obtained from Michel Levy’s ‘‘Htude sur la Determination des Felspaths,’’ and the values of «, 6 and y necessary for the solution of the equation ee cee Oy 1 oot Bt oF a ae from Idding’s ‘‘Rock Minerals.’’ They are here given in tabular form. The positions of the elements «, 6 and y and of the optic axes A and Bas well as the crystallographic forms (001), (010) and (100) are thus defined by the values of ¢ and p. The values of ¢ are measured in the plane of projection (vide Fig, 1) and the values of p are the distances of the elements from the centre of projection. This nomenclature is the Same as that conventionally adopted in crystallo- graphic work, Values for 7, and 7, were obtained for both the (010) and (001) sections of each felspar and graphs constructed. These are given in Figs. 2 and 3 respectively. A series of liquids was then prepared with refractive indices equal to the mean of the values obtained for 7, and r of the various felspars on the (010) and (001) faces respectively. The liquids used were mixtures of clove oil and momobromo-naphthalene and had the following refractive indices. 1, 1°535 3. 1°542 5. 1°558 7. 1°588 2. 1°540 4. 1°550 6. 1°562 These were then used to determine the refractive index of small cleavage fragments by the Schroeder van der Kolk method. et fo=] | 8G 801/89 |¢1z| sP lee] 4a | 69 | 48 |G0e| 06 | 06 | 06 |OSt| 92 | TAL] "UV "QV eqoperqey 5 19 |GOL|€G | 112] 4y | L7E| SF | L9 | F890] 06 | 06 | 06 OST) 96 | TAT} “FWV"AV eyAOpesqey S | 94|26 |se |80%| 99 )oce| Go | 1g | 82 | SIE] 06 | 06 |-06 | OST] 9 | TLT “uy *qy oulsepuy = | 4g |e6 |92 |76t) 9 |o | 89 ler | G2 |9T¢! 06 | 06 | 06 |O8T| 22 |iZ1] = "UV ay esepost{O = |06/0£ |zozlost| oz |1 | 92|47 | 92 |F1e]| 06 | 06 | 06 /OST] 23 | 1ZE| eV ay esepo8tO VL (G08 (GU -G1L 68 \1 -| 18/086) &2)/ 608) 06 |} 06/06 ORT 29 | 121) ao qv NqIVy dha dk Md dh cd Nib ld | bo) ob eh de | led A d 0 I Vv O10 O01 100 saideen *XII1JBOIPUT JO SOXY ‘saxy o11d0 186 ‘surp.iboasagg fo wuoron.ysuos oy7 wof pasnhas vjop hurarcb a)qQv], ““neions THE STETHOSCOPE. 187 In carrying out the work fragments of known felspars were used and the composition estimated from a determin- ation of the refractive index corresponded very closely with the known composition, Acknowledgements.—The above work was undertaken at the suggestion of Dr. Cotton, and I have to thank him for his assistance in carrying it out. The Geological Department, The University of Sydney. THE STHETHOSCOPH, WITH A REFERENCE TO A FUNCTION OF THEH AURICLH. By J. A. POLLOCK, D.Sc., F.R.S. | [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 1, 1920. | Ir apology were needed for a paper on the physics of a simple apparatus in such constant use as the stethoscope, it might well be based, in the first instance, on the remark- able paucity of references to the instrument in physical literature. The name ‘stethoscope’ does not occur in the subject index* to the Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific Papers, 1800—1900, nor is the appliance mentioned in any standard work on Sound which I have been able to consult. From medical sources? it appears that in discussions on the action of the simpler forms of stethoscope attention has been directed to the ‘sound conducting’ properties of solid rods and columns of air. As a dynamical aspect of the problem is not mentioned, I am led to consider that the explanation which I have to offer may be new. + Vol. 3, Physics, Partl. 2 See, e.g., Williams, B.M.J., Vol. 2, 1907, p. 6. 188 J. A. POLLOCK. Reference will first be made to forms of stethoscope in which the mechanical action is obvious. Types of such instruments are shown in section in figures 1 and 2, about one half natural size. r2TH N N 's a, In figure 1 aisa plate attached to the case of the instru- ment by a ring of elastic material e. Parallel to this is a fixed plate b. A layer of air, in communication with the ears through rubber tubes attached to the hollow arms ec, is thus formed between two plates, the lower one of which is capable of movement relative to the other. When in use the knob p is placed on the spot where it is desired to determine the nature of the mechanical movements. In figure 2 a is a base of thin flexible material. Such instruments possess two main features, very familiar to seismologists, a comparatively large mass—the case of the apparatus—and an elastic attachment connect- ing the mass to the surface which supports it. The equations of motion appropriate todynamical systems like these stethoscopes, when subject to vibration, are similar to those discussed with reference to the theory of THE STETHOSCOPE. 189 seismographs in books on seismology. Here an elementary description is all that is needed. Referring to figure 1, if the surface on which such a stethoscope rests suffers a sudden upward displacement, the plate a moves with it and the case of the instrument thus receives an impulse. Owing to the comparatively large mass of the apparatus, the displacement may be completed before the case appreciably alters its position. In virtue, then, of the elasticity of the connecting ring e and the inertia of the case, the initial result of a sudden displacement of the surface is a movement of the lower plate relative to the upper one. Such movements of the lower plate relative to the rest of the instrument create pressure pulses in the air con- tained in the apparatus which are transmitted through the air enclosed in the rubber tubes to the ears, to be there perceived as sounds. A similar description is clearly applicable to instruments. like that shown in figure 2. To the uninitiated, stetho- scopes of this latter class must appear unnecessarily massive. Simpler forms of instrument have now to be considered. The immediate discussion deals with those types of which the common trumpet or bell shaped binaural stethoscope, not provided with a diaphragm, may be taken as an example. As I am concerned here merely with the physical action and not at all with the interpretation of the sounds heard, my experiments have been made in connection with the vibrations of the surface of a slate bench, or wooden table, caused by very gently tapping or stroking the surface with the tips of the fingers or, in some cases, by the working of a watch with a smooth movement. With such surfaces, as contrasted with that of the human body, purely local 190 J. A. POLLOCK. disturbances, occurring, perhaps, within the area of the aperture of the instrument, are wholly avoided. Types of the forms tested, drawn about one half natural size, are shown in section in figure 3. Fig. 3. The instruments either rested on the table or were held, against the surface with the hand, the connection to the ears being through a rubber tube fixed to the projecting pipe. No. 3 gives the loudest sounds, but with respect to performance there is not much to choose between the forms shown; they are all efficient detectors of the surface movements, even No. 4 with a plane undersurface, only broken by the central aperture, gives quite good results. Here, indeed, one meets witha puzzle of long standing. It really Seems impossible to make anything with an aperture connected to an ear piece which will not act, in association with the ears, as a detector of small surface vibrations. As ordinarily used the stethoscopes are lightly held against the surface. The intensity of the sound is a maximum for a certain pressure of contact, but under the conditions of the experiments, all sounds cease if the instruments are pressed hard down on the table. The air in a stethoscope can be set into appreciable vibration by mere contact of the appliance with a vibrating body if the amplitude of the movement is sufficiently great. THE STETHOSCOPE. 191 This is usually the case with disturbances caused in wood by the working of a watch. The present discussion is limited to the realm of disturbances of smaller amplitude which do not give rise to sounds if the stethoscopes are pressed hard against the surface. That the vibration of the surface is not altered by the pressure can be ascertained by using an ordinary old fashioned wooden stethoscope. The intensity of the sound is not affected in this case by the force with which the instrument is pressed against the table. The observation, with stethoscopes like those in Fig. 2, that when held hard against the surface all sounds cease, indicates the solution of the problem of their action. When resting on the table, or held lightly against it, the instru- ments evidently float on the film of air between the surfaces usually considered as in contact. This film of air forms an elastic connection between the mass and the surface, and in explanation of the air pulses which actually reach the ears in the case of these simple forms of binaural stetho- scope there is nothing to add to the description just given in connection with the obviously mechanical type of instrument shown in figure 1. The evidence in favour of this explanation is, however, not confined to the fact that the sound ceases when the instruments are pressed against the surface, for before the extinction of the sound occurs, with increasing pressure applied by the hand, the pitch of the sound continuously rises. This efiect is a striking one and is to be expected if the mass is supported on a layer of gas. Ifthe gas were enclosed the vibration-frequency would vary as the square root of the gas pressure. The recognition of the elastic air film as a definite part of these simple appliances completely solves the puzzle previously mentioned, for the ‘steady mass’ is always 192 J. A. POLLOCK. present, and the instruments are, in respect to this part of their action, as definitely mechanical as the forms shown in figures 1 and 2. A large hollow cone, with its wider opening held against the table, the narrow end being connected by a rubber tube to an ear-piece, is a fairly good detector of small surface - vibrations. If sounds are heard with this apparatus they do not cease when the instrument is pressed hard against the surface, and the action is that of an ear trumpet. Thus, as a result of the previous discussion, stethoscopes of the forms examined must be considered, from a physical point of view, as instruments which locally transform minute mechanical movements of solids to corresponding vibrations of the air associated with them. Stethoscopes with conical shaped openings have, in addition, the property of concentrating disturbances already existing in the air as a direct result of the vibrations of the surface, but, with the instruments in ordinary use, any effect due to their Shape is wholly negligible in comparison with that of the local mechanical transformation. The old fashioned stethoscope, consisting of a hollow wooden or ebonite stem with a small conical opening at one end and an ear-plate at the other, still remains to be considered. Comparative observations, made by placing the ear against a vibrating surface and then against the ear plate of one of these stethoscopes pressed against the surface, show that very small movements are, in this way, as readily detected without the stethoscope as with it. Also in the case of vibrations of small amplitude, the intensity of the sound heard when using these stethoscopes is the same whether the stem of the apparatus is solid or hollow, so very little experimenting is required to prove that the main function of these instruments is to act as a part of the THE STETHOSCOPE. 193 vibrating surface to which the ear may be conveniently applied. With the experience gained from experimenting with instruments of the types previously described it can hardly be doubted that in connection with the use of the old fashioned form there is some kind of local transformation of vibrations from solid to air. As it is quite certain that the instrument plays no part in any such transformation we are forced to look beyond it. A feature of the art of the tracker here comes into view and a problem, appropriate to the point which the discuss- ion has reached, suggests itself:—how is it that minute movements of the ground are appreciated by listening with the ear to the surface ? The experience of the tracker to which reference is here made is known to everyone ina limited way, and certainly merits consideration. It is familiar from the habit of putting a watch under one’s pillow at night. . The matter may be readily investigated. With ground movements only barely detectable the following points are experimentally definite :— (1) On resting the head on the ground on the cheek bone no sound is heard until the head is turned so that the air between the folds of the auricle is almost wholly imprisoned by the surface of the ground. One can just appreciate that, in this position, the auricle is slightly pressed against the surface. (2) The intensity of the sound notably increases when the head is further turned so that the air associated with the auricle and ear passage becomes completely enclosed, and the weight of the head is definitely borne either wholly or in part by the auricle. (3) If while the head rests on the cheek bone, the auricle being free, the air connected with the auricle is imprisoned M—December 1, 1920. 194 J. A. POLLOCK. by holding a flat surface to the ear, no sound due to the ground vibration is heard. This point is of importance as it means that the sound heard when the head rests on the ear is not due to the air associated with the auricle and ear passage being set into vibration by the mere contact of the head with the vibrating surface. Such astonishing results are obtained by this method of detecting earth movements with the ear, that clearly a definite physical description is required of the way by which vibrations, of sufficient energy to give rise to the sensation of sound, are created in the air of the ear passage from the minute ground movements. In view of the last experience just mentioned, to account for the sounds heard with the ear to the ground, alterna- tives are only possible. Hither the auricle acts as an ear trumpet in concentrating disturbances already existing in 7 the air, or there is a local transformation of vibrations from the solid to the air of the ear passage. The auricle is not, however, fashioned to concentrate to any extent the energy of air vibrations. Further, the matter may be put to the test of experiment, and it is found that conical ear trumpets with apertures even ten times the area of the auricle will not pick up earth disturbances which are strikingly evident when the ear is laid to the ground. The former alternative may, therefore, be dismissed from further consideration. The maximum sound occurs: when the auricle is used wholly or in part as a rest for the head. In such a case. the air in the channels between the folds of the auricle, still in communication with the ear passage, becomes enclosed. On one side of this confined air is the surface of the ground, on the other the drum-skin attached to the massive head, while the auricle forms an elastic connection between the head and the ground. THE STETHOSCOPE. 195 The features so familiar in connection with seismoscopes are here again prominent, and in view of the whole evidence it may be confidently concluded that the head acts as a “steady mass,’ the auricle as the elastic support, and that the mode of transformation of vibrations from solid to air is exactly similar to that involved in the use of the stetho- scopes described in the earlier part of the paper. On this view, as the ground rises and falls, the auricle yields before the head, on account of its considerable mass, appreciably moves. Relative to the head the ground acts like the end of a concertina, the expansible sides being represented by the elastic auricle. The movement of the ground, though on a microscopic scale, thus gives rise to condensations and rarifications of the air in the ear passage which, if of sufficient intensity, are perceived as sounds. It appears, then, as a general result of the discussion, that the acoustic determination of surface vibrations has, in the last resort when the disturbances are very small, a definite dynamical aspect, the detection, in all the instances described, depending on the movements of the surface relative to a ‘steady mass’ elastically supported. In detecting small movements with the old fashioned stethoscope, or after the manner of the tracker, the mechanism is supplied by the head and ear, the auricle having the very definite function of acting as the elastic connection between the mass and the surface. In other cases, where the air disturbances are led by tubes directly into the ear passages, the mechanical action is recognisable -associated with the instruments. The minuteness of the movements which may be appre- ciated by this local transformation of vibrations from solids to air, either by instrumental means or by head and ear, is only another tribute to the. well known extraordinary sensitiveness of the ear to slight periodic fluctuations of pressure in the air. 196 . J. A. POLLOCK. From a physical point of view the auricle seems well adapted for the part which it plays in the detection of small earth movements, both with respect to the extent of the air connected with the ear passage which becomes enclosed when the head rests on the ground, and to its capability of being used as a support for the head. It is, perhaps, not | improbable that the exercise of the geophonic function of head and ear, certainly common among primitive people, may have been a factor in the development of the auricle in man. A model, which has to a slight extent the appearance, | but, when in use, almost exactly the action of the head and ear when detecting earth movements, may be made by embedding a complete ring of rubber tube in a groove ina wooden disc, the ring being about five centimetres in diameter and projecting a couple of millimetres or so below the surface of the wood. A pipe through a hole in the centre of the disc enables the apparatus to be attached by a rubber tube to an ear piece. When placed on the ground the layer of air within the circumference of the ring is enclosed, and the instrument, with an appropriate mass, gives effects not unlike those obtained with the head and ear. All appliances of this type, including stethoscopes, have natural periods of vibration, the movements in most cases being only slightly damped. These natural periods give a selective sensitiveness to the instruments, as in all similar cases, and dominant tones to the indications. This matter is of importance when the interpretation of the sounds is in question. [am unable to recognise in my own Case a period natural to head and ear The Physical Laboratory, i The University of Sydney. ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. 197 THE ESSENTIAL OILS oF LEPTOSPERMUM FLAVESCHNS var. GRANDIFLORUM AND LEPTOSPERMUM ODORATUM. By A. R. PENFOLD, F.C.S. [Read before lhe Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 1, 1920. | LEPTOSPERMUM FLAVESCENS var. GRANDIFLORUM Bentham. (LEPTOSPERMUM GRANDIFLORUM Lodd.) ~ THE botany of this species, is described by Mr. EH. Cheel in the present proceedings of this Society. It is a shrub varying from 6 to 10 feet in height, and like L. odoratum is found frequenting the beds of creeks and rivers. It was whilst gathering material of L. odoratuim for oil distillation that the species was met with and consequently leaves were collected for the same purpose. Only one distillation was made and as the oil did not possess any very special interest from an economic point of view it was not thought worth while collecting further supplies of leaves. The principal constituents are the two sesquiterpenes, aromadendrene and eudesmene, together with a sesquiterpene alcohol unidentified. As these sesqui- terpenes of a high levo rotation occur in quantity in the oil of L. odoratum, the chemistry of which is dealt with fully later in the present paper, it was considered advisable on account of this connection to include this species at the same time. The Essential Oil. 60 Ibs. of leaves were collected in the bed of the Nattai River, near Hill Top, N.S.W., and the oil obtained was equal to 0°61%. It was somewhat viscous and so dark in colour that its chemical and physical characters could not 198 A. R. PENFOLD. be determined untilit had been cleared up by washing with ’ dilute sodium hydroxide solution. By this means phenolic bodies and considerable ferric hydroxide were removed. Experimental.—The oil was then of a greenish-brown- yellow colour with a pronounced odour of sesquiterpenes. and had:— | Specific gravity at 15° C. a at «. 0°9324- Optical Rotation .. ae sine! Sea wee — 2°42" Refractive Index at £ 20° C. Det : 1°5048: Insoluble in 10 vols. 80% alcohol by wane Ester No. 1$ hours, hot saponification ay, 72 Ester No. after acetylation :— 2 hours contact in cold ue ie iva 7249S. 14 hours contact, hot... oe Eke w. 40°98 500 c.c. of oil were distilled at 10 mm., first drops came over at 99° CO. collected three fractions as below:— ; ; Refractive Fractions at 10 mm. ie eae 7 ae Index at 99 — 123° ©. | 1 c.c. ue Fes ae 193—132° O. | -30c.c. | -0°9217° | —2°52" a) sieseeeme 133-1560. | 174c.c. | 0°9456 | -3°91° | 1:5079 . Determination of the Sesquiterpenes. The two large fractions totalling 475 c.c. were allowed to stand over metallic sodium for several days and then repeatedly fractionated over the same metal at 10 mm. until about equal volumes of the following fractions of constant boiling point were obtained :— Boiling Point Specific Gravity Optical Refractive Index at 10 mm. at 16°C, ‘Rotation. at 20° C. 123 —125° C. 0°910 — 62° 1°4967 129 - 132° C. 0°921 + 0°72° 1°5063 Neither of these fractions would form any of the usual sesquiterpene derivatives, but gave the beautiful colour reactions with bromine vapour, halogen and sul phuric acids ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. 199 characteristic of aromadendrene and eudesmene (see below on the essential oil of Leptospermum odoratum). The constants given above agree well with those for these two sesquiterpenes. The sesquiterpene alcohol could not be identified, although eudesmol was tested for. ~- Phenolic Bodies.—Upon examining the alkaline liquor used in clearing the crude oil for examination, a mixture of solid and liquid phenols was obtained equal to about 2°57, on the weight of oil. It distilled at about 170—190° C. at 10 mm. and had specific gravity at 15° C.1°127. Refractive index at 20° C. 1°5405, inactive to light, and gave a charac- teristic blood red colouration with ferric chloride solution similar to that given by tasmanol.* As the mixture consisted of both liquid and solid phenols, the amount at disposal was too small to permit of separa- tion and identification. The essential oil of Leptospermum grandiflorum consists principally of leevo rotatory aromadendrene, eudesmene (slightly dextro rotatory) and an unidentified sesquiterpene alcohol, and is distinct from the oil of L. flavescens, the chemistry of which will be communicated early in 1921. My thanks are due to Mr. R. T. Baker, Curator of the Technological Museum for making available the facilities of the Institution, to Mr. H. Cheel for his kindness in per- sonally supervising the collection of the material, and Mr. F. Morrison, Assistant Chemist, for assistance in working out the composition of the oil and in helping in the collection of the leaves. LEPTOSPERMUM ODORATUM Cheel. . This species was described before this Society and given specific rank by Mr. Cheel and a full description of its botany is published.” | 1 Baker and Smith, ‘“‘ Research on the Eucalypts,” 2nd Ed., p. 396. * This Journal, Vol. tir, 122, (1919). 200 _A. R. PENFOLD. It is a shrub 3 to 5 feet high and is found almost invari- ably in the beds of creeks and rivers. It is well named by its author on account of the pleasant rose odour detected when the oil glands. are ‘ruptured. On account of its habitat great difficulty was experienced in obtaining sufficient leaves for distillation as although the locality selected for obtaining them—the bed of the Nattai River, near Hill Top, N.S.W.—is but 80 miles from Sydney, the rough and mountainous nature of the country and almost entire absence of transport necessitated personal collection. In this connection the writer is much indebted and desires to specially express his thanks and appreciation to Mr. Cheel for his work in supervising the collection of the whole of the leaves which was carried out at his own expense and entailed considerable personal inconvenience. It is due to his enthusiasm and energy that the chemical part of the work was enabled to be undertaken. The leaves distilled therefore are absolutely authentic. : The Essential Qil. The oil thus obtained from this species was yellow in colour, fairly mobile and possessed a pleasant terpene and rose-like odour, the latter being most pronounced when diffused. The leaves were obtained in every instance from the bed of the Nattai River near Hill Top, N.S.W., and were distilled within a few days after cutting. Altogether 190 tbs. weight of leaves and branchlets, cut as for commercial distillation, were distilled and gave an average percentage yield of 0°757%. The yield obtained from leaves cut during the months of August and October in different years was 0°97%, whilst those cut in the month of May showed but 0°4/%. This figure is slightly on the low side as the woody portion of the plant was present in larger amount than in the other lots. ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. 201 The eudesmol appears to be present in minimum amount at this time of the year, hence the bigh leevo rotation and low specific gravity of the May sample, and this was fortu- nate asit enabled the sesquiterpenes to be the more readily isolated. The principal constituents of the oil so far determined are :— (1) The dextro rotatory bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohol— eudesmol. (2and3) A mixture of two levo rotatory papaluiberpeuee —eudesmene and aromadendrene. (4) 6 pinene. (5) @ pinene. (6) Butyric and acetic acid esters of unknown alcohol, as well as small amounts of alcohol of citronellol - odour (not geraniol or citronellol), also small amount of both a solid and liquid phenol giving bright red colouration with ferric chloride solution. Free acids, aldehydes, ketones, phellandrene or limonene were not detected. This oil is of considerable scientific interest as it is the first record of the occurrence of the sesquiterpene eudes- mene in nature, it having previously been obtained by dehydration of the corresponding sesquiterpene alcohol. The presence of eudesmol in a Leptospermum has not been noticed before, and its occurrence in quantity in such is not without interest. This sesquiterpene alcohol has only previously been recorded as being present in the oils obtained from the Hucalypts.* Nopinene (f pinene) has not previously been identified asa definite constituent of Australian essential oils. The oil of this Leptospermum is therefore, quite distinctive in character and differs from that of any of its congeners so far described. + Baker and Smith, ‘‘ Research on the Eucalypts,” 2nd Ed., p. 379. 202 A. R. PENFOLD. Experimental.—The 190 tbs. of leaves and branches were collected at different periods and on distillation yielded crude oils which on examination gave the chemical and physical characters shewn in the following table :— Ester Nos, Percent-| Specific] Optical Refract. Ps}e" No-| Ester No. after Solubility in Date. age j|gravity| Rota- | Index | 1 Reagents ae Acetylation. | g07% aleoho yield. Jat 15°C | tion jat 20°C.) “san. | contact. | ——-_— | by weight. Hot. | Cold. 5/8/1917 | O°88% | 0°9246 | - 16°32°| 1°4960 72 72 91°93 | 33°95 | 1 vol in 10 15/5/20 | 04% | 0°9163 |-33 02°| 1.4989 55 56 57°00 | 21°55 | insol in 10 3/10/20 | 09% | 09280 !- 19°02°| 1°4990 72 42 87°03 | 22°60 |.1 vol. in 10 The saponification No.after acetylation of last distillation is a little lower than the first on account of portion of the eudesmol having been collected separately from the oil by increasing the steam pressure towards the end of distilla- tion. The amount of oil obtained was equal to 0°817/% and the crude eudesmol separately obtained = 0°097. The crude oils gave the following fractions on distillation: Sample 5/8/17. The acids forming the esters were separated by cold Saponification and were found to consist principally of butyric acid with a small amount of acetic acid. On then subjecting to distillation 50 c.c. of the ester-free oil the following fractions were obtained :— Initial boiling point 157° C. at 762 mm. Percentage Sp. Gravity Optical Refractive Index Boiling Point. saa OF at 15° C. Rotation at 20° C. 157-161 | 4 a a oh 1615 —165 14 0°8703 — 13°00" 1°4740 165 — 180 10 ant ac : Jee 180 — 240 10 sc wistd ee 240 — 269 23 0°9293 — 24°33" 1°5010 270 — 280 ih 0°9494 —17°20° 1°5095 280 — 285 9 0°9606 nil 1°5103 (solidified) - ~ Samples 15/5/20 and 3/10/20 were distilled under reduced pressure at 10 mm. 100 c.c. of each taken. dit eee sae etait tae ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. 203 Sample 15/5/20. Sample 3/10/20. Boiling Point. Percentage. Boiling Point. Percentage. at 10 mm. 60-— 90°C. 25% 60- 90° O.. 15% 90 —123 6 90 — 125 4 123—140 od 125-145 48 residue allowed to 145 — 160 23 solidify ... Ie LD residue allowed to a solidify ... Jets) 100 — 100 These fractions possessed the following constants :— ee é | Sp. Gravity | Optical | Refractiv Sample 15/5/20. gig? @.. || rotation |Indexat 20°C. 1st fr.60—90°C.ati0mm. 9°865i | —20°65°| 1°4757 2nd 90-123 0°8875 — 36°80 | 1°4870 3rd 123-140 | 0°9266 ~47°50° | 1°5063 Sample 3/10/20. 1st fr.60—90°C.at10mm. 0°8731 — 11°52" | °1°4760 2nd 90-125 — 0°8905 —22°60° | 1°4846 3rd 125—145 0°9309 —34°51° | 1°5065 4th 145-160 0°9587 —11°02°| 1°5107 Determination of Terpenes. The fraction boiling at 60 - 90° C. at 10 mm. from sample 15/5/20 was fractionated at 762 mm. and found to consist almost entirely of « and £ pinene :— Sp. Gravity Optical Refractive ap: ie io Boiling Foint © C. ateulon ie: Rotation ° |Indexat 20°C. Small fraction 156 — 159 0°8632 ~ 8°78 1°4719 Main fraction 160-164 0°8651 — 14°50 1°4747 Small fraction 164-169 0°8661 — 24°05 1°4751 The portion boiling at 156—159° OC. gave an excellent yield of nitrosochloride of melting point 104° O., which after careful purification melted and decomposed at 109° O. The other two fractions whose constants agree Well with those for B pinene? were mixed and 5 c.c. shaken with 12 grms. * Parry’s Essential Oils, 2nd Vol. p. 37. 204 - A. R. PENFOLD. ground pot. permanganate, 23 grms. caustic soda, 100 grms. ice and 600 c.c. water for several hours; saturated solution with CO. gas and steam distilled, then concentrated to about 200 -c.c. volume in CO, gas and extracted with chloroform several times to remove impurities. On further - concentration and cooling the characteristic crystals of sodium nopinate separated. These were pumped off and on addition of dilute H,SO, crystals of the free acid separated. These on purification and recrystallisation from benzene formed beautiful needles melting sharply at 127° C. The terpenes therefore are « and / pinene. Alcohol of Rose Odour. The constituent giving the delicate and characteristic odour of citronellol to the oil was not present in sufficient quantity for identification. Tt was found to be concentrated apparently in the sesquiterpene fractions boiling between 123 — 130° C. at 10 mm. from which it was separated by shaking the latter with 50% resorcin solution and subjecting this to steam distillation. Not more than a couple of c.c.’s were obtained in this way. It hada distinct odour of citronellol and refractive index of 1°4854 at 20° C. It was recovered unchanged after heating on a water bath for several hours with equal weight of phthalic anhydride in benzene solution (proof of it not being geraniol or citronellol). It did not form a phenylurethane. Determination of the Sesquiterpenes. These were worked up from Sample 15/5/20, fraction 125 — 140° O.at 10 mm. This was allowed to stand over metallic sodium for a week, and then repeatedly fractionated over this metal at 10 mm. until about equal volumes of the following fractions of constant boiling point were obtained: 205 ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. Boiling Point at | Specific Gravity Optical Refractive [Index 10 mm. at 15° C. Rotation ° at 20° C. 123 —126° C. 0°9152 —93°21 1°4975 129-132 0°9175 - 59°10 1°5078 Both liquids were quite colourless and mobile. Fraction 123—145° ©. of Sample 3/10/20 was treated in the same way with similar results except that the optical activity of the fractions was somewhat lower, being — 44°02” and —48°44° respectively. ; Neither fractions gave any of the well known derivatives. for sesquiterpenes, although the nitrosites were apparently formed at low temperature, but were too unstable to be handled at atmospheric temperature. Both the fractions gave the beautiful colour reactions previously described as. characteristic of the sesquiterpene aromadendrene,' of which two are as follows :— (a) Bromine vapour allowed to fall upon the surface of an acetic acid solution gave a violet crimson colouration changing to indigo blue. | | (b) A few drops H,SO, added to a solution in acetic anhydride gave a bright green colouration changing to deep blue on standing. The constants of the two sesquiterpenes separated cor- respond remarkably well with those now known for aroma- dendrene and eudesmene respectively, and for purposes of comparison are arranged in tabular form below :— Fraction (1) Fraction (2) Boiling Point at 10 mm, Specific Gravity at 15°C: Optical Rotation Refractive Index at 20°C | 128 - 126°C. 09152 -~ 53°21° 1°4975 Aromadendrenet| EKudesmenet 129: 132°C. 0:9175 -59°10° 1°5078 124 — 125°-C 0°922 EA 1°4.964. 129 — 132°C, 0-9204. [a]p +49° 1:5074 * Baker and Smith, ‘‘ Research on Eucalypts,” 2nd Ed., p. 417. + Semmler and Tobias, Bei. 46, 1913, 2026. ‘ Baker and Smith, “ Research on the Eucalypts,” p. 417. 206 A. R. PENFOLD. Although it is very difficult to separate sesquiterpenes in a high state of purity when their boiling points lie at all close, particularly when the quantity available does not exceed 50 c.c., still they appear to have been separated in as pure a condition as is possible. - As both of them gave similar colour reactions with bromine vapour, halogen and other acids, it was considered only reasonable that the eudesmene would do so even if only a trace of aromadendrene were present as the reactions are so delicate. HKudesmene, however, was prepared by two methods from pure eudesmol, M. Pt. 79—80° O. [a] 20°+31°07° separated from Hucalyptus Macarthuri, and it gave similar constants to those given by Semmler and Tobias, (Ber. 46, 1913, 2026). and Semmler and Risse (Ber. 46, 1913, 2303). Both these — preparations gave the identical colour reactions as described for aromadendrene, except that bromine vapour, besides giving the characteristic violet-crimson and indigo-blue colouration, showed a fine brownish fluorescence in reflected light much resembling a gold “‘sol.’’ These colourations therefore are given by both sesquiterpenes and are not distinctive of aromadendrene alone. The sesquiterpenes present in the oil are therefore leevo rotatory eudesmene and aromadendrene, and it is remark- able that the rotation of the eudesmene so found naturally, together with dextro eudesmol, should be levo rotatory when that prepared in the laboratory is dextro rotatory. Determination of the Sesquiterpene Alcohol. The residue from the crude oils distilled under reduced pressure, as also the fourth fraction from sample 3/10/20 were spread on porous plates for absorption of adhering sesquiterpenes to take place. After about ten days, the hard cakes were dissolved in alcohol, filtered and recrys- ESSENTIAL OIL OF LEPTOSPERMUM. 207 tallised by addition of water. This was repeated until crystals were obtained of fixed melting point after drying upon porous plates. It formed an exceedingly light and bulky white mass of well developed acicular crystals possessing a silky lustre quite characteristic of eudesmol. The crystals melted at 79—80° C. and boiled at 156° C. at 10mm. Three samples from different distillations after melting on water bath gave the following specific rotations in chloroform solution:— 0°7825 gram. in 10 c.c. CHCl; at 20° CO. |a]p 20° +31°95 1°3124 * 10 ,, OHCl, ms er +31°62 Fors -,, lO, CECI. “5 ar +32°06 It is therefore identical with the bicyclic sesquiterpene alcohol (eudesmol) present in the Eucalypts and of the same order of specific rotation as that present in Hucalyptus Maecarthuri.* The saponification number of the oil after acetylation is due to this alcohol. The oil of Leptosperum odoratum consists essentially of the following terpenic bodies :— Dextro rotatory eudesmol 2 Pinene Leevo rotatory eudesmene a Pinene Leevo rotatory aromadendrene together with small amounts of a rose odour alcohol, with butyric and acetic acid ester, and phenols, one of which is probably identical with tasmanol. Besides my previously expressed indebtedness to the author of this species (Mr. E. Cheel) I have also to thank Mr. R. T. Baker, F.L.s., Curator of the Technological Museum, for his interest in the work, and for making avail- able the facilities of the Institution, also to Mr. F. Morrison, Assistant Chemist, for able assistance in working out the composition of the oil and for his kindness in helping to collect portion of the material. Technological Museum, Sydney. * Baker and Smith, ‘“‘ Research on the Eucalypts,” 2nd Ed., p. 379. 208 M. B. WELCH. KUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. By M. B. WELCH, B.Sc. With Plates XI- XIV. [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 1, 1920. ] THE literature dealing with the Kucalypts is rather exten- sive, the species of the genus having received, in recent years much attention, particularly at the hands of sys- tematists, technologists and chemists. The anatomy of the various parts has perhaps been least investigated, and so in this paper it is proposed to give the results of some observations of the oil glands, their contents and structure. At the present time Eucalyptus oils are receiving much attention in the pharmaceutical, perfumery and general industries and the production of this commodity has attained very large proportions. The prominence which this industry has now reached has led me to investigate the oil in situ in the gland itself. The oil glands, as they are usually termed, occur in the leaves of almost every species but in varying number, reaching perhaps a minimum in the Bloodwoods; e.g., H. terminalis, where they are practically non-existent, and a Maximum in the leaves of some of our Mallees, e.g., EH. polybractea, E. costata and others. They reach a com- paratively large size in leaves with a width of less than 0°5 mm. while yet in bud. These glands also occur in the petioles, young stems, calyx, operculum and even in the fruits. In the case of barks, oil is rarely found, but never- theless exceptions occur in that of H. Bridgesiana and EH. Macarthuri. An examination of the bark of H. Macarthuri EUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. 209 was made, but though the odour of gerany!| acetate was noticeable in the freshly cut surfaces, no clear evidence of the presence of oil glands has yet been found, the bark’ being ina very friable condition. The yield from the bark of the latter species amounts to 0°127. Although the distribution and number of the glands is not of very great taxonomic value, yet, as pointed out in this paper, certain variations do occur and without doubt hold good throughout the distribution of the species. Again it is quite possible to recognise certain differences in their | arrangement which would permit of a rough classification into groups, of which some examples are given. ; In H. hcemastoma, EH. goniocalyx, EH. phlebophylla, EH. Moorei, etc., the glands are often distinctly flattened in a direction at right angles to the leaf surface and occur only in the palisade tissue, which in these species (isobi- lateral) is directed towards either surface, and do not encroach on the narrow zone of spongy mesophyll between. In the case of E. intermedia and EH. corymbosa for example, the distribution is somewhat different, the major portion of the gland being found in the spongy mesophyll, and is usually narrower towards the epidermis. In EH. piperita, E. aggregata, EH. hemiphloia, EH. Smithii, etc.,a type of gland is found which extends right across the leaf section. In EH. robusta and EH. resinifera the glands are comparatively large and extend well into the mesophyll but are usually directed towards the upper surface. In E. maculata, E. citriodora, EH. siderophloia and others the glands are small and directed towards either surface in approximately equal numbers. Although in almost every case an oil gland occurs towards the surface of the leaf, the epidermal cells forming the lid of the cavity being usually thinner than elsewhere, this very often does not appear in section. This N—December 1, 1920. 210 M. B. WELCH. can be readily understood since the cavity is more or less ovoid and only a section in the median plane will give a complete view of the structure. In the case of the young leaves of E. corymbosa, the oil glands are apparently formed from hypodermal meriste- matic cells and there appears to be no connection with the outer epidermis. It is in this species that a thin coating of rubber is found enveloping the young leaves, and this may possibly be the explanation, as it is apparent that at this stage of development at any rate, no purpose would be served by the gland discharging at the surface. The deep-seated glands are characteristic of petioles, e.g., EH. Luehmanniana, E. piperita etc., and also of stems as shown in H. Luehmanniana. It is evident that subse- quent cell division in the cortical tissues has occurred, thus removing the glands further from the surface in the older petioles and stems. In the very young structures mentioned the glands approached the surface. It is inter- esting to note that in the petioles of H. piperita the deep- seated oil-glands still contained oil, although no means of direct communication with the surface was found. A cross section of the leaf of any of the well known oil yielding species shows a number of these oil glands, or secretory cavities, in which the essential oil peculiar to the species is found. In section the gland varies in shape from an ellipse with the longer axis either at right angles or even parallel to the leaf surface, to an ovate or circular shape, but perhaps the most common form is that of ovate with the apex directed towards the upper or lower epidermis. According to Briosi (Anat. Foglie #. globulus), working on E. globulus alone, the first stages in the development of the gland are caused by segmentation of an epidermal and a hypodermal cell. The early stages in the formation of EUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. 74s bs | the glands, (E. Smithii being selected for the purpose) can best be studied in a’section of a leaf bud. The gland is then represented by amass of thin walled parenchy- matous cells with dense granular contents. Due partly to increase in size of the leaf, and consequently of the oil gland, the adnate mass of cells separates, forming a hollow ball. Further increase in size causes a breaking away of the central body from the interior walls of the enlarged gland, and disintegration occurs in the innermost cell tissues. Finally the gland is usually seen to be lined with the remains of collapsed cells, evidently caused by the Highly magnified median section of an oil gland in an inter- mediate stage of development. The separation of the interior cell mass (in section) from the wall of the cavity is quite pronounced. An extremely thin lid cell is seen at the top of the gland. The groups of small cells on either side of the gland indicate vascular bundles. Eucalyptus Smithii R. T. Baker. x 400. Dez M. B. WELCH. enlarged cavity encroaching on the surrounding paren- chyma. It would thus appear that the oil in this case is the outcome of the alteration of the already present cell contents. There are thrée methods by which secretory cavities | can be formed, namely:— (1) lysigenous i.e., breaking down of the secretory cells. (2) schizogenous i.e., separating apart of the secretory cells. (3) schizolysigenous i.e., a combination of the first two. Although Haberlandt, (Plant Anatomy, p. 516), and others state that the secretory cavities in the Myrtaceze are characterised by the schizogenous mode of formation, the evidence of the Hucalypts seems rather to indicate the third method, i.e., schizolysigenous, as far as this genus is concerned. It might be mentioned in passing, that the early gland development in some of the Rutaceze (which Order Haberlandt (l.c., 516), places in the lysigenous group) shows an apparently identical structure to that found in the early stages of H. Smithii. De Bary regarded the Myrtace- ous gland as being lysigenous in origin. Again, according to Haberlandt (l.c., 517), the secretory tissues of a schizogenous gland generally consist of a single layer of glandular cells, which are almost always readily distinguishable from the cells of the adjoining tissues in their form and contents. Solereder, (Syst. Anat.) does not regard the presence of an epithelium lining the fully developed cavity as being conclusive proof of a schizogenous origin, In the Hucalypts so far examined,-(over fifty species) an epithelial layer is not a conspicuous feature. The discharging mechanism of the gland is also important. Porsch, working on H. globulus and E. pulverulenta found EUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. 213 a cover of a single pair of cells with the outer and inner walls very thin, and the septum between them S shaped and irregularly thickened and pitted. The double celled lid ofthe gland may perhaps be characteristic of the Kucalypts, but the most striking feature is its want of definition, in this respect differing from the Rutacez. In most cases it is not an easy matter to decide which are the “‘lid cells”’ and which are typical epidermal structures, an example being H. piperita. So far there has been no occasion to consider an S shaped septum as typical, the division between the indefinite “‘lid cells’’ being usually straight or slightly curved. Turning now to the oilin the gland, it would seem that the idea of the oil being present as asingle drop, as usually shown in text books, was not altogether justified. The contents as seen are usually contracted in places from the side of the gland, and in some cases the contents are so sparse as to merely form a fringe round the interior of the cavity. In a number of leaves examined the gland contents appeared to have a fine granular appearance, though in some cases small droplets were also seen. These granules on treatment with alcohol of various strengths coalesced, finally disappearing when the alcohol became sufficiently _ strong to cause solution of the oil; apparently indicating the presence of an emulsion. As one would expect the percentage of alcohol necessary for complete solution varies in the different species, from 507% in the case of H. austra- liana, E. Luehmanniana, etc., to 95/7 in H. aggregata, E. oleosa and others. No matter what metabolic changes give rise to the oil, it is evident that in the first place it must be in an extremely fine state of division, analogous to the formation of a chemical precipitate. The presence of a protective colloid 214 M. B. WELCE. e.g., a protein body, would tend to inhibit coalescence of these minute droplets, and this apparently is what occurs. An artificial emulsion of Kucalyptus oil was prepared and stabilised by the addition of a protective body, the magni- tude of the particles of the disperse phase being approxi- mately of the same order as those in the oil gland. The - addition of dilute alcohol caused a breaking up of the emulsion, in some respects a parallel case to that mentioned above. The following is a summary of the results obtained by treating, with different strengths of alcohol, sections of the leaves of several of the species :— HK. AUSTRALIANA. In the majority of cases the cavity was not completely filled, but showed contraction from the sides, or even large bubbles. The addition of 35% alcohol caused the latter to burst and consequent contraction ensued. 50% alcohol sometimes caused the contracted mass to again rupture, when it lined the wall of the giand. Total disappearance occurred in 50—70/ alcohol. HK. GLOBULUS. Contents minutely granular, little change occurring up to 80% when small droplets formed. In 90% contraction occurred and the mass became darker in colour, finally going into complete solution in 95%. K. OLEOSA. Contents with dark coloured granules and small droplets, the latter running together with 35. Contraction occurred in 50% and the granules increased in number on standing, but cleared again with additional 50%. In 70%, the struc- ture became more densely granular, forming droplets in 857 with slow contraction, and finally disappearing in 95%. EUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. 215 Some glands showed marked contraction with 35%; others did not until 85-90% was reached, though the contents varied in granularity, especially under 85%. EK. LONGICORNIS. Slight contraction occurred in 357, but little effect up to 85% when contents became densely granular, the whole breaking up in 957%. Ki. AGGREGATA. Some glands showed yellowish contents stretching irregu- larly across the cavity, Some were completely filled, others again contained cellular tissue packed with globules. 30% caused an increase in granularity, which continued up to 70-80% when coalescence to form droplets took place. Gradual clearing and contraction occurred in 90% with total disappearance in 95%. In some glands 80/ was sufficient for complete solution of the contents. EK. LUEHMANNIANA. A number of the glands showed no contents, others were completely or partially filled. Ina number of cases ‘‘burst- ing’ of the contents occurred in 307%. Final solution occurred usually in 50—60%. KX. CORIACKA. Distinct cellular divisions were seen in some glands though the majority were without contents or were irregularly lined with dark substance, (the former case is evidently due to the gland not being in median section). Glands containing cellular tissue in which were dense granules showed clearing up to 60% when only a few globules were left. Those with a fringing of dark material behaved inasimilar manner. A few glands were observed with the cavity completely filled with a matrix, but “burst- 216 M. B. WELCH. ing’’ usually occurs in 30%, leaving a small residue finally soluble in 70% alcohol. The observations given are sufficient to indicate the great variability in the behaviour of the oil in the glands under the different species. Variation also occurs even in the one species, for example in the final solubility, thus seem- ing to indicate differences, within limits, of the oil product. There are still several interesting and unsolved points awaiting investigation, and these I hope to deal with in a later paper. In conclusion I wish to record my indebtedness to Mr. R. T. Baker, F.L.s., Curator, Technological Museum, for the great assistance he has given me at all times in collect- ing the data for this paper. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. PLate XI, Eucalyptus Moores Maiden and Cambage. Cross section of a portion of a mature leaf near the edge. The oil glands are in this species situated towards either epidermis and are confined to the two palisade zones, never extending across the narrow intermediate spongy tissue. The glands are commonly flattened in a direction parallel to the leaf surface. Three prominent bicollateral vascular bundles are indicated by the red stained tissue. «x55, Puare XII. Eucalyptus Smithi R. T. Baker. a. Horizontal section of a young leaf below the epidermis, showing arrangement of the oil glands in the leaf tissue. The glands are in various stages of development, and the separation from the interior wall of the cavity of the cells containing the oil in very minute globules, isseen. x 60. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol. LIV., 1920. Plate XI. Eucalyptus Moorei. X 55. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W.,Vol LIV., 1920. Plate XII. ay Eucalyptus Smithii. x 60. b Eucalyptus Smithii. x 55. Journal Royal Society of N.S. W., Vol. LIV., £920. Eucalyptus Smithii. x 110. Plate XIII. Eucalyptus Smithii. xX 65. Journal Royal Society of N.S.W..Vol. LIV. 1920. Plate XIV. Eucalyptus Luehmanniana. x 40. EUCALYPTUS OIL GLANDS. ds Wy f Eucalyptus Smitha R. T. Baker. 6. Transverse section of a leaf bud, including the young stem, showing oil glands in various stages of the leaf development. x 55. « Puate XIII. Eucalyptus Smitha R. T. Baker. a. Cross section of a very young leaf illustrating how important a feature the oil glands are at this stage in its development since such a large amount of space is taken up by them. x 110. Eucalyptus Smith R. T. Baker. 6. Transverse section of a young leaf ata somewhat later stage than the preceding figure, the largest cavity represents a compara- tively late stage in the development of the gland. The glands are here, as is usual, directed towards either surface. x 65. Puate XIV. Hucalyptus Luehmanniana F.v.M. Transverse section of a young stem showing the deep-seated nature of the oil glands. This is evidently brought about by growth of the stem due to the phellogen. x 40. Technological Museum, Sydney. 218 G. HARKER. THH THMPERATURE OF THHK VAPOUR ARISING FROM BOILING SALINE SOLUTIONS. By GEORGE HARKER, D.Sc. [Read before the Royal Society of N. 8. Wales, December 1, 1920.)] THE temperature of the vapour arising from a boiling solution has been the subject of much dispute, and even now different opinions appear to be held. Some think that the temperature is substantially the same as that of the solution, others that it is the same as that of the vapour from pure water boiling under the same pressure. Sakurai in his paper ‘* Determination of the Temperature of Steam arising from Boiling Salt Solutions,’’! has given a brief historical summary of the views held and the experimental work carried out upto that time. From this it appears that Faraday was the first in 1822 to publish a paper bearing on the question. He found that when the bulb of a thermometer was sprinkled over with a salt and then introduced into steam coming from boiling water, the thermometer showed a higher temperature than 100°. From these experiments Faraday concluded that since a salt solution was heated up to its boiling point by the action of steam at 100° (a fact which was evidently known at that. time) the steam generated from a boiling salt solution had only the temperature of 100°. Gay-Lussac on theoretical grounds disagreed with this view as he considered that the vapour must have the same temperature as the liquid with which it is in contact. Faraday then published another paper in which he stated that he had proved Gay-Lussac’s. assertion to be correct, but that in order to do so he had 1 Journ. Chem. Soc., 1892, 61, 495. TEMPERATURE OF VAPOUR FROM BOILING SALINE SOLUTIONS. 219 to use a double-walled vessel which contained the boiling solution not only between the walls but above them, and that he had to heat the thermometer previously to a tem- perature higher than the solution. Sakurai criticises these experiments adversely, pointing out that as the walls were of highly conducting material, the steam would be heated by them. In fact he says, it can be shown that by keeping the walls of a vessel at 110° the steam issuing from boiling water itself indicates a temperature almost equal to the walls. Rudberg in 1835 published the results of a long series ae of observations from which he con- cluded that the temperature of the vapour arising from boiling salt b solutions was exactly the same as Ss that from the pure solvent, i.e., 100° j [ under ordinary pressure. Since his u cA fi time many papers have been pub- lished, some holding one view and some another. In the experiments carried out by Sakurai the solution was boiled in Y a flask F (see Fig. 1) the walls of which, above the level of the solu- epeelitab as 2 t tion, were enclosed in a glass. F cylinder J J, so as to form a jacket. This jacket was filled with hot SE vapour at a slightly lower temper- ature than the solution, so as to reduce to a minimum radiation losses from the vapour arising from the boiling solution. The vapour was derived by boiling a liquid in a separate flask. It entered the jacket Fig. 1. by the tube w and passed out by r 220 G. HARKER. into a condenser. Steam from a separate flask could be blown into the solution through the tube t, while the vapour issuing from the boiling solution passed away from the flask through the tube s. The corrected thermometers a, b, and c gave the temperatures of the vapour from the boiling soijution, the solution itself, and the vapour in the ~ jacket respectively. The results obtained in a typical experiment are shown below :— Temperature of the eta eee easel) Difference in Temperature. Op | a | an) (Mota 127°5 1283. 126°5 0°8 1°0 128°1 1985 | 1268 0-4 13 128°6 128°9. ag t27 2 0°3 1°4 129°1 129°2 1278 Or1 1°3 129°4 12955) = 28a O°1 1°3 1) L20°7 oi 298 Is 0°0 1°3 In this experiment a strong solution of calcium chloride was employed and amyl alcohol containing a little of the lower alcohols was used for the jacket. The time occupied was about twenty minutes. From the results of his experiments, Sakurai concluded that he had proved beyond any reasonable doubt that the temperature of the vapour escaping from a boiling salt solution is exactly the same as that of the solution. But although his experiments were carefully conducted the results do not seem to have met with general acceptance; probably owing to the doubt as to whether the vapour arising from the solution did not gain heat from the sur- rounding jacket. Apparently the temperature of the jacket - was always below that of the vapour of the solution (com- pare cols. (I) and (III) in the above Table), but, on looking TEMPERATURE OF VAPOUR FROM BOILING SALINE SOLUTIONS. 221 into the matter more closely, it is clear that the temper- ature of the inner wall of the jacket must have been higher than the temperature registered by the thermometor c. Although the leading tubes wu and t were lagged to prevent condensation the jacket itself was notlagged. There must have been very considerable condensation and reduction of temperature on the outer wall of the jacket, in fact the conditions were those of air condensation of the vapour. The temperature shown by the thermometerc would depend, under these circumstances, upon its position relatively to the inner and outer walls of the jacket, and there could easily be a considerable difference in the temperature of these walls with a vapour at 130° and the outer wall un- lagged. The thermometer in the diagram is shown midway between the two walls, so that it is quite possible that the temperature of the inner wall of the jacket was consider- ably higher than that shown by the thermometer c, and that consequently heat may have been supplied by the jacket although the thermometer c was lower than a. Another drawback to Sakurai’s experiments is that the vapour for the jacket was not obtained by boiling a pure liquid. Hither acetic acid diluted with water, or amyl alcohol containing a little of the lower alcohols, was used. This was unfortunate, because the temperature of this vapour must have risen gradually as the liquid was distilled. Although this rise is shown in the experiments quoted, there is no data to indicate how much the temperature of the thermometer c was lower than the temperature of the vapour as it left the flask from which it was distilled, In the case of the amyl alcohol it can be assumed, from the fact that it contained a little of the lower alcohols, that it was derived from fusel oil. The main constituent of amyl alcohol from this source, viz. isobutyl carbinol, boils at 131°4°. It is also known that amyl alcohol from fusel oil distils principally between 128° —132°, so that looking 227 G. HARKER. at the above experiment it appears likely, in confirmation of what has already been said, that the thermometer c was showing a lower temperature than the temperature of the entering vapour. This of course leaves a doubt as to whether the vapour from the solution was not deriving heat from the jacket, and whether if the experiment had been continued, the temperature of the vapour would not have risen higher than the solution itself, showing definitely that the vapour was being superheated by the jacket. Seeing that the main point at issue is whether the tem- perature of the vapour from a boiling solution is or is not | higher than the vapour from the boiling pure solvent, it does not seem necessary to prove that the temperature of the vapour is identically the same as that of the boiling solution. If a substantial difference between the tem- perature of the vapour arising from a boiling solution and from the boiling pure solvent can be established, the main purpose of the enquiry will be achieved. It is claimed that the experiments now to be described establish this difference in a simple but direct manner. They have been conducted with the view of eliminating any possibility of raising the temperature of the vapour by heat from an outside source, and, while the observed tem- perature of the vapour has been much below that of the boiling solution, it has been substantially higher than 100°, the temperature of the vapour from the boiling pure solvent water. From the manner in which the experiments were conducted, and owing to the care taken not to add heat, loss of heat from the vapour after leaving the boiling solu- tion was unavoidable, yet in spite of this loss the vapour still showed a temperature much higher than 100°. The experiments were carried out in a hypsometer kindly lent by Professor Pollock from the Department of Physics of the University. As will be seen from the diagram (Fig. TEMPERATURE OF VAPOUR FROM BOILING SALINE SOLUTIONS. 223 a 2) the vapour arising from the boil- 2 ing solution passed up the central ‘column, and then down the outside space before entering the condenser tube K, to the top of which a glass condenser was attached. The con- densed water was led by a tube L back to the bottom of the hypsometer and thus kept the solution at constant concentration. A brass coil S was inserted in the bottom of the hypso- meter in order that steam could be blown in if required. The addition of steam of course altered the concen- tration. Two thermometers were inserted into the centre column of vapour. The bulb of one A, was just halfway down the column, and was about ten inches above the level of the boiling solution, the other B, was nearer the cork and opposite the pas- sage into the outer space. In the above arrangement the inner column of vapour arising from the boiling solution is jacketed by the vapour outside, which is of course ata lower temperature, so that although radiation losses are minimised, a certain loss of heat from the inner vapour to the outer must take place. There is, therefore, no possi- bility of the vapour in the outer jacket supplying heat to that in the centre column. Superheating of the vapour in the jacket was effectually prevented by placing the hypso- meter on a large piece of asbestos cardboard, provided with a small hole in the centre through which the flame ‘of the bunsen burner impinged on the bottom of the hypsometer. There is still the possibility that heat may have been con- Fig. 2. QA: G. HARKER. ducted from the boiling solution to the metal surrounding it, and so to the metal cylinder separating the inner column of vapour from the outer. = bl However, the presence of water running continuously from the condenser ensured that the bottom portion of the jacket contained saturated water vapour at a temperature | certainly not higher than 100°. The presence of even a trace of water on the walls of the inner column always prevented the thermometer A from rising above the tem- perature of the vapour of the pure solvent. In the early stages of the boiling of the solution the thermometer A usually remained quite stationary for ten minutes or more, © at the temperature of the vapour of the pure solvent, although the solution was boiling vigorously all the time. It would then rise showing that all trace of water had disappeared from the walls of the centre column. It is, therefore, certain that the presence of water in the lower portion of the jacket effectually prevented conduction of heat from ‘the solution through the metal walls of the jacket. The thermometers used were corrected in the hypsometer in the usual way by boiling distilled water. The results of a typical experiment follow. The solution Tacs Thermometer A. Thermometer B. Rendeee 10°35 nae Started. 10°39 ae | Solution boiled. 10°43 99°9 sea 10°48 99°9 99°0 10°50 101°0 99°2 11°0 104°5 100°4 11°6 105°5 100°4 11°14 105°3 101°0 11°20 106°0 103°2 11°26 106°0 103°8 - TEMPERATURE OF VAPOUR FROM BOILING SALINE SOLUTIONS. 225 employed in this case was made by dissolving 220 grams of anhydrous calcium chloride in 400 grams of water and boiled normally at 115° C. A maximum difference of 6°1° C. was obtained. A baro- metric reading confirmed 99°9° C. as the boiling point of the pure solvent. In his paper Sakurai mentions that he obtained a very much greater elevation of temperature in the vapour arising from the boiling solution, when lie passed steam into the flask owing to the fact that there was a greater volume of vapour arising from the solution, and consequently less relative loss of heat by radiation. Steam was admitted in Some experiments but made very little difference to the temperature of the vapour. It was thought of interest, however, to see what would result on boiling the solution by steam alone in the absence of the bunsen flame. The figures obtained in such an experiment are given below, and it is to be understood that the operations in the fourth column were carried out immediately following the taking of the readings placed opposite them. The solution used was more dilute than in the previous experiment and boiled at 110°4° C. qm é. Thermometer AR Thermometer Bee | eee 1°30 103°2 £00 | 1°34 103°2 100°2 Steam admitted. | £35 103°6 101°0 | £37 103°5 102°0 Removed flame 1°39 103°1 101°6 also condenser 1°42 102°8 101°6 Steam shut off, 1°44 102°4 101°2 flame and con- denser replaced 51 102°7 101°6 O— December 1, 1920 226 G. HARKER, The admission of steam only raised the temperature from 103°2° to 103°6°. It immediately began to fall owing to dilution of the solution. The bunsen flame was then removed, and with it the condenser, in order to prevent too rapid dilution of the solution. The vapour arising from the solution still remained well above the temperature of 100° C. Its temperature gradually fell but that this was due to the dilution of the solution was proved by shutting off the steam, replacing the condenser, and boiling again by the bunsen flame. Ina few minutes the thermometers A and B showed the sama readings as were obtained just before the steam was shut off. This experiment was of interest, because it showed that the bunsen flame was not causing superheating. The results obtained prove that the vapour arising from a boiling solution has a higher temperature than the vapour from the boiling pure solvent. Since in these experiments the vapour was cooled after it left the solution, there can be little room for doubt but that it leaves the solution at the same temperature as the boiling solution itself. It is therefore steam in an unsaturated condition. NOTES ON TWO ACACIAS. High Fh NOTHS ON TWO ACACIAS. By J. H. MAIDEN, I.S.0., F.R.S., F.L.S. [Read before the Royal Society of N. S. Wales, December 1, 1920. | 1. A form or race of A. pycnantha Beuth.; ora new species, for which the name of A. Westoni is proposed. I desire to invite attention to an Acacia which I have had under attention for several years, and which I believe has certain characters which sufficiently distinguish it from A. pycnantha Benth., but examination of the leaves (mature pbhyllodia) and floral organs on which descriptions of species are usually based, fails to disclose differences of sufficient importance for the ordinary detailed description. It is in regard to other characters, which I shall bring for- ward, that the necessity (in my view) for naming this Acacia has arisen. The following is an unpublished translation of the original description of A. pyenantha Benth., in Hooker’s London Journ. Bot. i, 351 (1842). “Very glabrous, shining, branchlets terete, phyllodes elongate- falcate, obtuse or somewhat acute, gradually narrowed at the base into a petiole, coriaceous, marginate with a rather.large gland removed from the base, racemes flexuose pleiocephalous, shorter than the phyllode, heads very dense, more than 70-flowered, calyx a little shorter than the corolla, ovary hispidulous. Affinity is A. leiophylla, easily to be distinguished by flowers often almost }09 in the head, corollas shortly prominent out of the ciliate calyx. Tnterior of New South Wales, Mitchell.” I have never seen the type. Bentham, who describes his own species more fully in B.FI. ii, 365, neither mentions the type, nor New South Wales. He quotes Victoria com- 228 J. H. MAIDEN. prehensively, and there seems but little doubt that what he meaut in 1842 as New South Wales referred to Victoria before the separation, and Mitchell’s route through Victoria in 1836 would enable the modern botanist to pick upa very close approximation to the type. | Habitat—The habitat of A. Westoni is the northern and western slopes of Mount Jerrabomberra, near Queanbeyan and within the Federal Territory, vide plan (not reproduced). The altitude is 1950 to 2400 feet above sea level. The area of distribution is approximately 2000 acres. The nature of the soil is sandstone of very fine texture at the higher levels, on the lower levels the soilis of the nature of a clay-loam formed in large measure from an overlying fractured shale. Size—Twelve of the largest at three feet from the ground gave an average girth of 24°396 inches. Six of these were above twenty-five inches and six below. Their height is. twelve to fifteen feet. A few of the best specimens are fully eighteen feet, The best specimens are invariably found on the lower levels. The great mass of trees are upon the higher portions of the mount. ‘This no doubt is in great measure due to the fact that here the country is unimproved, whereas upon the lower places grazing has been in full swing for many years. The other trees observed in the area are Acacia dealbata,. A. diffusa (?), A. rubida, A. decurrens var. mollissima. Of the above, A. diffusu (?) is by far the most numerous. The other species are represented by a few specimens only. Also Eucalyptus macrorrhyncha, HE. polyanthemos, E. melliodora, E. tereticornis (?), E. Stuartiana and HE. maculosa. Of these HE. mucrorrhyncha is the predomin-. ating species. A sample of the bark has been analysed with the follow- ing result :— to bo eo) NOTES ON TWO ACACIAS. Moisture... om ve NOES H. Cheel, June 1919. In examining this material, either in the field or in the herbarium there is no difficulty in separating it from the typical forms of L. flavescens Sm., but there is some super- ficial resemblance to L. citratum Chal. Cheel and Penf., and to another form which seems to belong to L. Petersoni Bail. When critically examined, there is no difficulty in separating it from L. citratum, but it remains to be seen if L. Petersoni of Bailey and the var. graudiflorwm of Ben- tham are really distinct. It is of special interest to note that L. grandifiorum Lodd., is upheld as a distinct species in Walper’s Rep. Bot. System Tom. ii, p. 168 (1843), and that two other synonyms are quoted, namely, L. brevifolium Wendl. fil. in Otto et Dietr. Allgem. Gartenzig, i, 186, and L. obtuswm Lodd. Cat. ex G. Don in Lond. Hort. Brit. 195, with the following descrip- NOTES ON LEPTOSPERMUM VAR. GRANDIFLORUM. DOP tion:—‘‘Foll. obovatis spathulatisve emarginatis v. apice rotundatis, 3-basi 5-nerviis punctatis glabris; calycib. glabris, dentib. membranaceis coloratis deciduis.’’ The two latter synonyms are not mentioned by Bentham, but according to Index Kewensis L. obtusum is = to L. flave- scens, whilst L. brevifolium is = to L. buxifolium Wendl. (Non Dehr.), which is = to L. flavescens. From the description given in Walper l.c., it would appear that L. grandiflorum of Lodd is very closely allied to L. emarginatum Wendl. (L. obovatum Sweet), especially as the two species are placed in section Spathulata under subsection Hmarginata, It is rather difficult to say at present what L. grandifiorum of Loddiges really is, and until we are able to clear the matter up, as to whether the species is to be found in Tasmania it will be advisable to refer the specimens from the above mentioned localities, to the var. grandifiorum of Bentham, notwithstanding the fact that I regard them abundantly distinct from L. flavescens and worthy of specific rank. Mr. A. R. Penfold has procured a quantity of leaves from plants growing in the bed of the Nattai River via Hill Top, also some material of the typical L. flavescens from the neighbourhood of Hill Top for distillation, and I feel there will be no difficulty in proving these to belong to two distinct species. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS moins Rex f OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMopal Soctety of Flew South Giales. MAY 5TH, 1920. The Annual Meeting, being the four hundred and twelfth General Monthly Meeting of the Society, was held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, Sydney, at 8 p.m. Dr. R. Greig-Smith, Acting-President in the Chair. Fifty-four members and five visitors were present. The minutes of the General Monthly Meeting of the 3rd December, 1919, were read and confirmed. | The certificates of thirteen candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: four for the second and nine for the first time. Messrs. A. A. Hamilton and G. I. Hudson were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. C. A. Sussmilch deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. “The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society, Frederick Cooke, Kustace William Ferguson, William John Kirchner and Arthur Hamilton Tebbutt. The Annual Financial Statement for the year ended 31st March, 1920, was submitted to members, and on the motion of Professor Chapman, seconded by Mr. R. T. Baker, was unanimously adopted :— 1V. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. GENERAL ACCOUNT. RECEIPTS. £ Ss eee To Balance, Cash on hand and at Bank, Ist April, 1919 », Subscriptions— Annual ... » Rents— Offices ... . ol2 5 =o Hall and Fabrart ey SSlOwaG » Sundry Receipts .. » Government Sunaidy for 1919 . » Clarke Memorial Fund — Amounts received to date PAYMENTS. By Salaries and Wages— pee Si (b Office Salary and Accountancy Fees - ISL torre Assistant Librarian ... Jor (ABI OTRO Caretaker . 164 19 9 », Printing, Stationery, Advertising, Stamps, etc.— Stamps and Telegrams DLS a 2 Office Sundries, Stationery ete. 8 8 4 Advertising 14 9 O Printing 94 2 6 » Rates, Taxes and Services— Electric Light 20 LI Gas nae 9 9 9 Insurance 23 11 O Rates 2 161° 20:20 Telephone 10 O 1 » Printing and Publishing Society’s Volume— Printing, etc.... Bookbinding ... », Library— Books and Periodicals », Sundry Expenses — Repairs... Ase A Lantern Operator (Bent oa Tanteen) Bank Charges... Sundries Carried forward . ose ao 10 56. 16.49 dL 14 3 OF Tab 210 4 34 15 4 oe 7S 16 32 °S 601 13 O 400 15 0O 27 FF ae 399 19 10 50 0 O £1496 8 1 {Sage 404 14 9 168 18 O 23112 8 379. “1 § 88 6 10 T3ev~d iG La5r 4 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vv. PAYMENTS—continued. £ s. d. £ 58. d. Brought forward ie oe 1351 1. 3 By Building and Investment Fund— Interest on Mortgage 500 560 wae 126 10 0O ,, Balance— _ Credit Balance at Union Bank of Australia 17 15 1 Cash on Hand .. ae 8 ae ade oly Ea —— 18 16 8 £1496 8 1 Compiled from the books and accounts of the Royal Society of New South Wales, and certified to be in accordance theiewith. HENRY G. CHAPMAN, m.p., Honorary Treasurer. W. PERCIVAL MINELL, F.c.P.a., Sypney, 7TH APRIL, 1920. Auditor. BUILDING INVESTMENT LOAN FUND. BALANCE SHEET AS AT 3l1lsT Marcu, 1920. LIABILITIES. fe Searle Loan on Mortgage— Amount due to the Australasian Association Advancement of Science #e: ith 44 2300 0 O £2300 O O ASSETS. £ os. d. Leis. A. Cash, Government Savings Bank ce a 179520) 0 Commonwealth War Loan ae rae Bp 200 O O Balance as at 3lst March, 1919 Res oe 1 VOSS SO Less: Interest received during the year .. 1415 0 —. 192 > Or. oO £2300 O O STATEMENT OF Receiprs AND Payments, 3lst Marca, 1920. RECEIPTS. he eo. - ee. 7See Gr To Balance, 3lst March, 1919, Government Sav- ings Bank oo a Ms si le 264 5 O ,» Interest—Commonwealth War Loan... cer 415 0 Government Savings Bank .. mee LOP 30. 0 14 low aG ,, Amount received from General Fund... sae 126 10 O £405 10 O P—December |, 1920. Vi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. PAYMENTS. £ eoads By Interest paid to the Australasian Association Advancement of Science mi a = an 126 10 O >, Commonwealth Peace Loan ide a, Ae th 100 0 O », Balance, Government Savings Bank bis Ne . 179 O O £4105 10 0 BooKBINDING Funp, 3lst Marca, 1920. LIABILITIES. &.. snes Accumulation to 3lst March, 1918 i, ee fe on, SOM LOG ASSETS. War Saving Certificate ... pat is he sas luao | OX. OSS CLARKE MEMORIAL FUND. BALANCE SHEET, 31st Marcu, 1920. LIABILITIES. & 8. d.- 285 semen Accumulation Fund— Balance as at 3lst March, 1919 ae ae 702 710 Additions during the year— Interest Savings Bank of N.S.W. 1 ieee Fee 9) ‘5 Government Savings Bank ... 0 2 2 re Commonwealth Savings Bank 015 7 5 Commonwealth War Loan ... 32 10 O —— —— 34 8 9 £736 16 7 - ASSETS. £ -s.:.d.. 2s 2ede Commonwealth War Loan... oe oh es ; 600 0 O Cash Savings Bank of N.S.W. oe ofa soe, ONO aa », Commonwealth Savings Bank = xe ee Ao » Government Savings Bank ... en woe (2O 12S —— — 8616 7 Loan to General Account ... ae ae ie 50 O O £736 16 7 STATEMENT OF RECEIPTS AND Payments, 3lst Marca, 1920. RECEIPTS. £ s. .d. — i Seaeae To Balance 3lst March, 1919. Savings Bank of N.S.W. _... af Ae 2238 Suse Government Savings Bank... a sve, 4 Oa Commonwealth Savings Bank ... .. 20.0975 6 — 102 710 Carried forward... me ites 102 7 10 ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Vil. mas rst ee) 8: dd. Brought forward yh ae 102 7 10 To Interest to date— Savings Bank of N.S.W. bare al) Government Savings Bank... sas wey OF ie Commonwealth Savings Bank ne Onome | War Loan >... bes ia e a oe LOL O — 34 8 9 £136 16° 7 PAYMENTS. Presi dt 2st de By Loan to General Fund ... a oi ne 50 O O ,, Balance at date— Savings Bank of N.S.W._... Bi tw com orl Commonwealth Savings Bank oe ae 12 gelion } Government Savings Bank .. Be se ace ee A) 86 16 7 £136 16 7 On the motion of Mr. W. Poole seconded by Mr. R. W. Ohallinor, Mr. W. P. Minell was duly elected Auditor for the current year. The Annual Report of the Council (see pp. 25 —36) was read, and on the motion of Mr. R. H. Cambage, was adopted. In addition the following particulars are recorded: During the Society’s year there have been eight monthly meetings and nine ordinary and one special Council meeting. A Clarke Memorial Lecture entitled ‘‘ Geology at the Western Front,’’ was delivered by Professor T. W. Hdgeworth David, C.M.G., D.S.0., F.R.S., on August 21st, 1919. Four Popular Science Lectures were given, namely:— July 17—** The Romance of Silver-lead in Australia,”’ by Mr. W. M. Poole, B.z., A. M. Inst. C.E. September 18—‘‘Science in Breadmaking,’’ by Pro- fessor H. G. Chapman, M.D. Vili. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. October 16—‘* The Causes of Earthquakes,’ by Mr. L. A. Cotton, M.A., B.Sc. November 20 —‘‘ Temperature: ItsControland Measure- ment,” by Mr. W. M. Hamlet, F.1.C., F.C.S. . Owing to the illness of Professor S. J. Johnston, the lecture which stood in his name for June 19th, ‘‘On the Kctoparasites of Man,’’ was not delivered. On October 7th, 1919, a dinner was given by the Society at the Burlington, 324 George Street, to those members who had returned from active service at the front, and we were honoured by the company of His Hxcellency the Governor General Sir Ronald Craufurd Munro Ferguson. The Acting-President announced that the following Popular Science Lectures would be delivered this Session : June 17th—*‘The Kctoparasites of Man,” by Professor S. J. Johntson, B.A., D.Sc. July 15th—“*The Romance of Broken Hill,’’ by Mr. HK. OC. Andrews, B.A., F.G.S. August 19th—"‘ Bovine Tuberculosis and the Necessity for its Repression,’’ by Professor J. D. Stewart, B.V.Se., M.R.C.V.S. September 16th—*‘ Kinstein’s Theory of Space and Time,’ by Mr. EH. M. Wellish, M.A. It was announced that the following members had died during the recess:—Mr. R. Htheridge, Mr. Edward Noyes and Sir Thomas Anderson Stuart. Letters were read from Mr. N. Htheridge, Mrs. Noyes and Lady Anderson Stuart expressing thanks for the Society’s sympathy in their recent bereavements. In pursuance of a previous notice of motion, Mr. A. B. Hector moved:—‘‘That the time is now opportune to con- sider the advisability of obtaining for the Royal Society of New South Wales, more commodious and up-to-date ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 1X. premises, so as to have ample room for the proper housing of the library, and more room and better facilities for the social intercourse of its members.”’ This was seconded by Mr. A. D. Ollé and supported by the following members:— Messrs. W. Poole, T. H. Houghton, W. Welch, R.’W. Challinor, Dr. G. Harker, Professor H. G. Chapman, Dr. R. K. Murphy, Judge Docker and Professor T. W. E. David. The motion was carried unanimously. The following donations were laid upon the table :—227 parts, 31 volumes and 16 reports. At the request of the Council, Mr. J. H. Maiden, 1.S.0., F.R.S., delivered a lecturette, illustrated by means of lantern slides, on the Landing of Captain Cook and Sir Joseph Banks in Australia, with special reference to the action of the first scientific Society in Australia, the Philosophical Society of Australasia, in placing a brass tablet at Kurnell in honour of these illustrious scientific explorers. As more-than the necessary number of members of Council had been nominated, a ballot was taken, after which the Acting- President declared the following gentle- men to be officers and Council for the coming year:— President: ; J. NANGULE, F.R.A.s. Vice-Presidents: T. H. HOUGHTON, m. Inst. c.k. W. S: DUN: J. H. MAIDEN, 1.s.0., F.R.8., F.u.8. | Prof.'.W. EDGEWORTH DAVID, CM G., D.S.0., F.B S. Hon. Treasurer: Prof. H. G. CHAPMAN, m.p. Hon. Secretaries: Rk. H. CAMBAGE, F.L.s. | J. A. POLLOCK, vse. F.R.S. Members of Council: C. ANDERSON, m™.a., D.se. Prof. J. READ, M.A., PH.D., B.Sc. E. C. ANDREWS, BA., ¥F.G-s. He G.) SMEREG ee.s. R. GREIG-SMITH, p.sc. Cc, A. SUSSMILCH, F.a.s. CHARLES HEDLEY, F..:s. J. VICARS, M.z. mow, QUAIEE, M.A., M.D. Prof. VW. H.WARREN, Lu.D., WH. Se XxX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The Acting-President then installed Mr. James Nangle, F.R.A.S., aS President for the ensuing year, and the latter expressed his appreciation of the honour conferred upon him, On the motion of Professor H. G. Chapman, a cordial vote of thanks was passed to Dr. R. Greig-Smith, both for — his services as Acting-President since December 1919, and for his efforts to further the best interests of the Society. JUNE 2np, 1920. The four hundred and thirteenth General Monthly Meet- ing was held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m? Mr. James Nangle, President, in the Chair. Thirty-two members and nine visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of eleven candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: nine for the second, and two for the first time. Messrs. A. J. Sach and W. Welch were appointed Scru- tineers, and Mr. EK. C. Andrews deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. 3 ! | The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society:—Edgar Harold Booth, Hon. Sir Joseph Carruthers, Herbert Henry Hinds, Edward William Hulle, James Campbell McDowall, Robert Jackson Noble, Arthur Ramon Penfold, Marcus Baldwin Welch, and Edward Montague Wellish. The President announced that it had been decided to present an address of loyalty and welcome to His Royal Highness the Prince of Wales on the occasion of the visit ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Xi, of His Royal Highness to Sydney. The following isa copy of the Address :— To His Royal Highness, Edward Albert Christian George Andrew Patrick David, Prince of Wales, Earl of Chester in the Peerage of England, Duke of Rothesay, Earl of Carrick and Baron of Renfrew in the Peerage of Scotland, Lord of the Isles and Great Steward of Scotland, K.G., P.c., G.M.M.G., G,M.B.E., M.C. May it please Your Royal Highness— We, the Members of the Royal Society of New South Wales, a daughter society of the illustrious mother society, which has so long enjoyed the privilege of Royal patronage, desire to approach Your Royai Highness with our most respectful and cordial greet- ings on the occasion of this the first visit of Your Royal Highness to Australia. This visit, momentous in the History of our Commonwealth, will assuredly make for that advancement of knowledge for which our Society exists, and which is so essential to human progress, and will ever. be memorable for strengthening the sympathy, loyalty and atfection between the Motherland and this country. We further desire to express the hope that this visit to Aus- tralia will hold for Your Royal Highness many pleasant memories, and we tender to you our earnest wishes for your health and happiness now and always. Signed on behalf and in the name of the Royal Society of New South Wales. i (Signed) James NANGLYE, President, 1920. It was announced that the Society would hold a conver- Sazione early in September, provided portion of the Uni- versity building would be available for use on that date. The following donations were laid upon the table:—92 parts, 2 volumes, and 4 reports. xii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. ‘‘Action of Cupric Chloride on Organo-metallic Deriva- tives of Magnesium,” by HE. B. Turner, M.A.,M.8c.,A.1.C. This paper was read by Professor J. Read in the absence of Mr. Turner. 2. “On the manufacture of Thymol, Menthone and Men- thol from Eucalyptus Oils,’’ by H. G. Smith, F.c.s., and A. R. Penfold, F.c.s. Remarks were made by Professor Read, Mr. A. B. Hector and Dr. R. Greig- Smith. 3. “‘A new species of Queensland Ironbark,” by R. H. Cambage, F.L.S. Remarks were made by Mr. R. T. Baker. The President tendered a cordial welcome to Dr. A. P. Newton, Rhodes Professor of Imperial History in the University of London. EXHIBITS: 1. Mr. EK. C. Andrews exhibited a facetted, ice-scratched boulder weighing about 120 tbs. found by Mr. L. J. Jones and himself in Permo-Carboniferous formation about five miles north-west of Gulgong, being the first glacial boulder recorded from this locality. 2. Mr. A. A. Hamilton exhibited from the National Her- barium, examples of the contorted “‘Teasel’’ Dipsacus sylvestris torsus grown by Professor De Vries in the Botanic Gardens at Amsterdam, which formed part of the evidence advanced in favour of his theory of muta- tion. ‘‘Species and Varieties: their origin by Muta- tion. Hugo De Vries, p. 402.”’ A flower-head (capitulem) of the ‘* Fuller’s Teasel,”’ used by woollen cloth manufacturers to give a “nap” to fabrics. | ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xili. JULY 7TH, 1920. The four hundred and fourteenth General Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. T. H. Houghton, Vice-President. in the Chair. Thirty-five members were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of six candidates for admission as ordin- ary members were read: two for the second and four for the first time. Messrs. A. HE. Stephen and H. V. Bettley-Oooke were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. C. Hedley deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society:—Ernest Thomas Fisk and William Horace Paine. A letter was read from the Secretary to His Royal Highness the Prince of Wales in reference to the address of loyalty and welcome recently presented by this Society, and the Secretary stated that His Royal Highness much appreciated the splendid work done by the Royal Society and sent all its members his best wishes. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. “On Aprophyllum Hallense, gen. et sp. nov. and Litho- strotion from neighbourhood of Bingara, N.S.W.,’’ by Stanley Smith, M.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., (communicated by Prof. W.N. Benson, D.Sc. F.G.S.). Remarks were made by Mr. Maiden. 2. “Descriptions of three new species of Eucalyptus,”’ by J. H. Maiden, 1.8.0., F.R.S. Remarks were made by Mr. Hector. | Xlv. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. EXHIBITS: 1. Mr. R. H. Cambage exhibited two small dead branches of Eucalyptus coriacea from the tree line at 6,500 feet on Kosciusko, which showed the dominating effect of the westerly aspect, the western sides of the branches being worn smooth and white while the eastern sides. still retained the bark. 2. Mr. H. C. Andrews exhibited some pebbles from Mount Drysdale, near Cobar, which had been elongated by earth pressure. 3. Mr. A. B. Hector exhibited a coloured diagram, and spoke of analogies existing among various physical phenomena. Mr. R. W. Challinor made reference to certain trees of Platanus orientalis near the Sydney Railway Station which ~ were retaining their leaves on the side next to the electric light, while on the opposite side the leaves had all fallen. Remarks were made by Messrs. A. A. Hamilton, R. H. Cambage, H. N. Ward and J. H. Maiden. AUGUST 4TH, 1920. The four bundred and fifteenth General Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s House, 5 EHlizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. James Nangle, President, in the Chair. Thirty-eight members and two visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of seven candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: four for the second and three for the first time. | Messrs. G. Hooper and G. I. Hudson were appointed Scrutineers, and Dr. R. Greig-Smith deputed to preside at. the Ballot Box. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XV. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society:--Sydney Joseph Gilbert, Albert Sherbourne Le Souef, Cecil William Mann and John Sulman. Professor A. Liversidge wrote from London thanking: members of the Society for their message of greeting sent by them when assembled at the Annual Dinner. The following donations were laid upon the table:—268 parts, 10 volumes, and 11 reports. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. “‘A Geological Reconnaissance of the Stirling Ranges of Western Australia,’’ by W. G. Woolnough, D.Sc., F.G.S. This paper was read by Professor T. W. E. David in the absence of Dr. Woolnough. 2. °“‘Harly Drawings of an Aboriginal Ceremonial Ground,”’ by R. H. Cambage F.L.s. and Henry Selkirk. Remarks were made by Messrs. J. H. Maiden, D. Carment, and G. H. Halligan. EXHIBITS: 1. Mr. A. B. Hector exhibited some crystal formations of metallic bismuth and carborundum. 2. Mr. R. H. Cambage exhibited a specimen of fungus found by Mr. R. G. Wilson growing in a gold mine at Salida in Sumatra, and which had been identified by Mr. H. Cheel as probably a form of Fomes lucidus Fr. SEPTEMBER Ist, 1920. The four hundred and sixteenth General Monthly Meet- ing was held at the Society’s House, 5 Hlizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. James Nangle, President, in the Chair. forty-two members and one visitor were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. XV1. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. The certificates of four candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: three for the second and one for the first time. Messrs. A. D. Ollé and A. B. Hector were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. H. G. Smith deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society:—Albert John Fortescue, John Gower Stephens and Harvey Sutton. The folowing donations were laid upon the table:—108 parts, 1 volume, and 3 reports. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. ““The Volcanic Neck at the Basin, Nepean River,’’ by G. D. Osborne, B.Sc., (communicated by Prof. T. W. E. David, C.M.G., D.S.0., F.R.S.). Remarks were made by Mr. W. R. Browne and Professor David. 2. ‘““Acacia Seedlings, Part VI, by R. H. Cambage, F.L.S. Remarks were made by Messrs. T. I. Wallas, A. B. Hector and R. W. Challinor. 3. “‘On a Box Tree from New South Wales and Queensland,”’ by J. H. Maiden, I.s.0., F.R.S. EXHIBITS: 1. Mr. R. T. Baker exhibited some timber specimens show- ing traumatic growth. Remarks were made by Messrs. J. H. Maiden, H.G. Smith and R. H. Cambage. 2. Mr. A. A. Hamilton exhibited a series of timbers from the National Herbarium, Botanic Gardens, represent- ing various phases of traumatism (a) Callus over a shot wound in the ‘ Red Pine,’ Callitris calearata, Wyalong, F. W. Wakefield, 8/1918; (b) Repair of an axe-cut in HKucalyptus sp. Nambucca Heads, H. G. Beale, 3/1917; (c) Strangling ofa young tree of Pinus radiata (insig- nis) by a neglected stake tie. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XVil. 3. Mr. J. H. Maiden exhibited specimens and drawings of the new species of Hucalyptus described in his paper. Also a number of Hucalypts collected by Allan Oun- ningham in Oxley’s First Expedition to the Interior in 1817 which are of scientific and historica] interest. 4, Mr. T. I. Wallas exhibited portion of a sweet pea plant, and briefly discussed the question of assimilation of nitrogen by plants. 5. The President exhibited a photograph showing the character of the star images on a photograph taken at Sobral on May 29th, 1919, during the total eclipse of the sun. | OOTOBER 6TH, 1920. The four hundred and seventeenth General Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. James Nangle, President in the Chair. Forty-eight members and two visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of four candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: one for the second and three for the first time. Messrs. A. J. Sach and G. Hooper were appointed Scru- tineers, and Mr. J. Vicars deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The following gentleman was duly elected an ordinary member of the Society:—Reginald George Downing. The President announced the deaths of Mr. B. J. Smart and Rev. W. W. Watts. The following donations were laid upon the table:—25 volumes and 73 parts. XV1ll, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. A letter was read from Mrs. B. J. Smart expressing thanks for the Society’s sympathy in her recent bereave- ment. Short addresses were given on the Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress held at Honolulu during August, 1920 :— Mr. C. A. Sussmilch, the delegate deputed to represent the Royal Society, explained to members that this first Congress had for its object the co-ordination of our existing knowledge of the Pacific region, so as to make the best preparation for an early and comprehensive study of the resources of that region, including Anthropology, Agricul- ture, Coral Reefs, Plant and Animal Distribution, Geodesy, Geography, Isostasy, Geology, Oceanography, Vulcano- graphy, Seismology and related subjects. Mr. O. Hedley gave a brief account of the remarkable flora and fauna of the Hawaiian group, illustrated with lantern slides. In the opinion of Mr. Hedley, the pecu- liarities of the distribution of the plants and animals con- noted a former land connection of this island group with continental masses, or at least with islands now far distant to the south. The connection had been necessarily in the nature of continuous land bridges, but may have consisted of land forms rising above the sea in some directions, and being submerged simultaneously at others. . Mr. E. C. Andrews showed lantern slides illustrating the physiography of the Hawaiian group. He dwelt on the interesting fact that volcanic action appears to have been a marked feature over the whole group at a recent period, but it appears also as time progressed to have passed gradually from the north-west to the south-east group where active volcanoes now only occur... Dr. L. A. Cotton, with the aid of lantern slides dwelt briefly on the wonders of the active volcanoes at Kilauea, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. RIK, and described interesting observations of Dr. T, A. Jaggar, Junr. and others at the volcano at Kilauea. EXHIBITS: 1. Mr. A. B. Hector briefly referred to certain analogies between sound and light in connection with the move- ments of approaching and receding bodies. 2. J. L. Somerville, B.Sc, and W. G. Woolnough, D.Scz., furnished the following note on a brilliant display of marine phosphorescence which was seen at Pittwater, Broken Bay. ‘On the evening of 6th September, 1920, we spent some time in watching, from Newport Jetty, a somewhat excep- tionally brilliant display of marine phosphorescence at Pitt- water. The time was 8°45 p.m. and the night was intensely dark, phenomenally still and oppressively silent. The whole surface of the bay was sparkling with pin-points of phosphor- escent light, reminding one of a spinthariscope. When a stone or clod of earth was thrown into the water there was the usual splash of pale phosphorescence, the comet- like effect of the brilliantly illuminated sinking object, followed by a ‘tail’ of ghostly light, and the phosphorescent air bubbles rising through the water as they became detached from the missile. If several stones were thrown into the water in succession the response became progressively weakened; in other words the phosphorescence exhibited a decided fatigue effect. The fact which was uuique in our experience of such phenomena was that it was accompanied by an infinitesimal, though distinctly audible crackling sound, somewhat resembl- ing that of an electrical discharge, or the boiling of a very viscous liquid. Our attention being drawn to the fact we examined the matter critically, and were able definitely to connect the appearance of each flash in the confined space under the jetty with an individual minute explosion. XX. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS The whole phenomenon was suggestive of explosive spon- taneous oxidation of some unstable chemical substance. The meteorological conditions were so remarkably favour- able that the occurrence seemed worthy of record. Up to this point we are positive as to the accuracy of our ~ observations, and we publish them with confidence. One of us, (W.G.W.) imagined that a very faint and elusive pungent odour could be detected. As this idea may have been sub- © jective, oras the smell, if present, may have arisen froia any- thing in the vicinity, from mud-flats to motor launches, we do not put this observation forward with any confidence.” NOVEMBER 38prp, 1920. The four hundred and eighteenth General Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s House, 5 Hlizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. James Nangle, President, in the Chair. Twenty-seven members and one visitor were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of nine candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: three for the second and six for the first time. Messrs. A. J. Sach and A. A. Hamilton were appointed Scrutineers, and Mr. K. C. Andrews deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary members of the Society:—Eldred George Bishop, Jiri Victor Danes, and Anthony Hordern. The following donations were laid upon the table:— volumes, 117 parts, and 6 reports. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xxl. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. “* Notes on Hucalyptus No. [X, with descriptions of three new species,’’ by J. H. Maiden, I.S.0., F.R.S. 2. ““On a new Angophora,’”’ by J. H. Maiden, I.s.0., F.R.S. Remarks were made by Mr. R. T. Baker. 8. “The calculation of refractive index in random sections of minerals,’”’ by L. A. Ootton, M.A., D.Sc, and Miss Mary M. Peart, B.Sc. EXHIBITS: Mr. H. Oheel exhibited a fine series of fresh specimens of “‘Bottlebrush’’ (Callistemon) representing 16 distinct species and three varieties or colour forms, as well as two species undescribed, taken from cultivated plants in the Botanic Gardens by kind permission of the Director (Mr. J. H. Maiden) supplemented with a few from his private garden at Ashfield. Also fresh specimens of the true Swainseona galegifolia cultivated at Ashfield from seeds collected near Wombeyan Caves in December last, which . are identical with the figure in Bot. Mag. tab. 792, together with the variety coronilifolia and var. alba, from the Botanic Gardens. DECEMBER ist, 1920. The four hundred and nineteenth General Monthly Meeting was held at the Society’s House, 5 Elizabeth Street, at 8 p.m. Mr. James Nangle, President, in the Chair. Forty-eight members and three visitors were present. The minutes of the preceding meeting were read and confirmed. The certificates of twelve candidates for admission as ordinary members were read: six for the second and six for the first time. Q—December 1, 1920. XXil. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Messrs. H. Cheel and R. W. Challinor were appointed Scrutineers, and Professor J. Read deputed to preside at the Ballot Box. The following gentlemen were duly elected ordinary membersof the Society:—George Brabason Carleton, James .. Hliliott Furneaux Mann, John James Richardson, Basil Sawyer, Rupert Boswood Scammell, and Harry Williams. The following donations were laid upon the table:—5 volumes, 175 parts and 2 reports. THE FOLLOWING PAPERS WERE READ: 1. ‘“‘The Stethoscope, with a reference to a function of the Auricle,”’ by J. A. Pollock, D.Sc. F.R.S. Remarks were — made by Rev. E. F. Pigot. 2. ‘“‘The Hssential Oils of Leptospermum flavescens var. grandifiorum and Leptospermum odoratum,” by A. R. Penfold, F.c.s. Remarks were made by Messrs. H. G. Smith and R. W. Challinor. 3. ‘*BHucalyptus Oil Glands,” by M. B. Welch, B.8c.,-A.1.C. Remarks were made by Messrs. R. T. Baker and J. H. Maiden. 4, ‘‘Temperature of the vapour arising from boiling saline solutions,’’ by G. Harker, D.Sc. Remarks were made by Professor Pollock, Drs. Greig-Smith and Walkom. ‘*Notes on two Acacias,’”’ by J. H. Maiden, I.s.0., F.R.S. ot 6. ‘‘Notes on Leptospermum flavescens var. grandifiorum,’’ by H. Cheel. EXHIBITS: Mr. R. OC. Simpson showed a lantern slide of phot diffraction bands. * *K * ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XxXill. ‘Summary of lecture, September 16th, 1920, entitled ‘“ KINSTEIN’S THEORY OF SPACE AND TIME.” By E. M. WEttIsH. According to the undulatory theory, light consists of vibrations in a medium commonly known as the ‘ether of space’; this medium transmits electrical and optical disturbances through it with the velocity of 186,000 miles per second. Bradley’s experiments on the aberration of light prove that the «ther outside matter is at rest. Michelson and Morley attempted in 1887, by a refined -optical experiment to measure the ether drift, 7.¢e. the velocity with which the earth moves through the ether. The result of the experiment was entirely negative, the most careful observations failing to bring out this ether drift. Lorentz and Fitzgerald accounted for the negative result by assuming that the dimensions of a moving body contract slightly in the direction of motion, but this explanation was not satisfac- tory, as it led to other difficulties of a serious nature. In 1905 Einstein, a Swiss, now Research Professor at Berlin, investigated the logical consequences of the hypothesis that it is utterly impossible to bring out experimentally motion with respect to the ether, the only possible motion being that of matter with respect to matter. In his earlier or restricted theory he confines his considerations to the case when the body (usually the earth) is moving uniformly in astraight line. He shows that all observers must agree in assigning the same velocity to a beam of light, even though the observers may be in very rapid motion with respect to one another. The standards of length and time employed by the observers must therefore alter according to their state of motion. Hinstein gave the exact relations according to which these stand- ards would alter with the motion. Among other results he showed that two observers in relative motion could record a definite event as occurring at slightly different positions in space and at slightly different times. XXIV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Minkowski used the relations of Einstein and showed that if time be added as a fourth dimension to space the two observers would record the event alike in this four-dimensional world. Space and time are thus, as it were, ideas introduced by the observers, the only reality being a blend of the two; various observers resolve the real world differently into space and time, just as the vertical direction differs for people who live in different latitudes. Einstein subsequently generalised his theory so as to apply to alltypes of motion. He showed that it is impossible to distinguish between a permanent field of force such as gravitation and a certain peculiar type of motion; in fact, by choosing suitable axes of reference gravity can be disregarded, just as the traveller inside the projective described by Jules Verne regarded the contained bodies as being without weight. By making use of this equivalence and by using the conception of a four-dimensional,world Einstein succeeded in expressing the law of gravitation as a relation between space, time and mass. From this relation he deduced that space and time in the vicinity of matter are slightly distorted so that the ordinary propositions. of Euclid are no longer strictly valid. The space in the vicinity of matter has many points of resemblance to the space imaged in a slightly convex mirror. In particular a ray of light which moves in a straight line when distant from matter is slightly bent when passing near a large mass such as the Sun. Einstein calcu- lated the deflection to be expected and his prediction was verified by the published results of the British Astronomical Expedition to Brazil in connection with the solar eclipse, 29 May, 1919; this deflection was twice that calculated on the Newtonian view that light consists of corpuscles or minute bodies. There will be an Astronomical Expedition to Australia to observe the solar eclipse occurring in September, 1922, and it is confidently expected that further valuable information will be obtained. Ss GEOLOGICAL SECTION. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE SeOrOGicAlL SECTION Monthly Meeting, 12th May, 1920, Mr. R. H. Cambage in the Chair. Hight members and two visitors were present. Professor David and Mr. W. R. Browne were elected Chairman and Honorary Secretary respectively. EXHIBITS: 1. From the Mining Museum:—(a) Etched slice of the Yenberrie meteorite, an octahedral iron; (b) a bismuth- silver-gold sulphide (perhaps a new mineral species) from Kangiara, near Yass; (c) amblygonite from Lady Don Mine, Kuriowie; (d) Baryto-celestite, Trangie; (e) Diatomite with fossil fish remains, Bugaldi. 2. From the Australian Museum :—(a) Stilbite from Garawilla, near Gunnedah, a superb specimen presented by Mrs. Hubert Kelly; (b) colourless garnet (grossularite) and vesuvianite from near Bowling Alley Point. 3. By Mr. W. R. Browne:—(a) Varve rock from the tillite of Pre-Cambrian age (?) at Campbell’s Oreek, Poolamacca ; (b) contorted pegmatite vein in granulite, Broken Hill; (c) Pyrites pseudomorphed by limonite in schist, near Mount Gipps Railway Station, Broken Hill district. Father Pigot discussed recent earth movements in the Pacific, especially that which occurred early in February and was particularly marked in the region south of New Britain, in the neighbourhood of the deep trough discovered and surveyed by the German exploring ship ‘‘ Planet.”’ XXVill, ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Dr. Cotton pointed out that a study of the time and direction of the New Britain earthquake lends support to the view that earthquakes are precipitated by tidal stresses. Monthly Meeting, 9th June, 1920. Professor David in the Chair. Sixteen members and seven visitors were present. EXHIBITS: 1. From the Mining Museum :—(a) a curiously-carved tuffaceous stone from New Guinea (collected. by Mr. Mac- Donnell); (b) model of a gold nugget recently found at Mudgee; (c) travertine from Belubula Caves; (d) copper sulphate from Mount Hope Mine, formed by the decompo- sition of copper pyrites; (e) auriferous mispickel from Hill End; (f) a polished section of the Yenberrie meteorite exhibiting octahedrite markings. 2. From the Australian Museum: —(a) crystal of beryl embedded in native bismuth from Torrington; (b) quartz erystals fractured and re-cemented by secondary silica, from Goodwin’s Cut, Kingsgate. 3. By Dr. Walkom :—A fossil from the Newcastle Coal- measures, possibly an equisitaceous stem. 4. By Messrs. Andrews and L. J. Jones:—Ice-scratched quartzite boulder from three chains above Beryl Bridge, Reedy Creek, Gulgong district. This was found in steeply dipping Permo-Carboniferous strata, and indicates a new area for Permo-Carboniferous glacial beds. 5. By Judge Docker:—an enlarged photograph of a mass of ironstone having the appearance of a petrified log, from Wentworth Falls. ~, => ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xxix. PAPER : The Chairman gave an account, illustrated by diagrams, of some interesting geological features revealed during the construction of the tunnel under Parramatta River between Long Nose Point and Greenwich. The bed of the old river is found to be at a depth of about 165 feet below present high water mark, indicating a fall of about 10 feet. per mile between this point and the railway bridge at Meadowbank. What appears to bea slight fault occurs in the tunnel and has caused much trouble. The nature and significance of the deposits revealed by trial bores at intervals across the river were discussed. Messrs. Rankin, Halligan and Melville commented on various points raised in the address. 3 Monthly Meeting, 14th July, 1920. Professor David in the Chair. Fifteen members and four visitors were present. It was resolved that the time of meeting be 7°45 p.m. in future instead of 8 p.m. EXHIBITS: 1. From the Mining Museum:—(a) two meteorites, from Warialda and Barraba respectively, which with the Bingara meteorite probably represent one fall; (b) amygdales in basalt, filled with opal, from Tintenbar opal field, Ballina. 2. From the Australian Museum:—Hexagonal calcite from Garabaldi Mine, near Lionsville. | PAPER: Dr. Woolnough addressed the meeting on ‘“* The Coal Fields of West Australia and the Associated Rocks,”’’ deal- ing in interesting fashion with the stratigraphical, litho- XXX. ABSTRACT OF PROCERDINGS. logical and tectonic features of the Collie Coalfield ; brief reference was also made to the coal measures of the Irwin River district. Discussion of the address was postponed to a special. meeting. Special Meeting, 21st July, 1920. Professor David in the Chair. Ten members and one visitor were present. The business of the meeting was the postponed discussion of Dr. Woolnough’s paper on the West Australian Coal Fields. Dr. Woolnough exhibited a revised section across. the Irwin River area, and gave a vertical section of the Stratigraphical succession. His remarks were illustrated by a fine suite of rock specimens and fossils, A discussion followed in which most of those present participated. Monthly Meeting, 11th August, 1920. Professor David in the Chair. Hight members and eight visitors were present. EXHIBITS: 1. By Mr. Watkin Brown:—A collection of minerals. from the Royal Ontario Museum, including fine specimens of sodalite, pink vesuvianite, oligoclase, pyroxene (crystal 1 inches long), pseudo-hexagonal phlogopite, smaltite and associated minerals, argentite, allemontite, skutterudite, breithauptite and spencerite. 2. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse for Mr. A. Combe:—A series. of photographs of the Grampian Mountains, Victoria, illus- trating various geological] structures. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. SA) 3. By Mr. L. L. Waterhouse :—A specimen of pigottite from Redruth, Cornwall, recently presented to the Uni- versity by Mr. F. Danvers Power. DISCUSSION : The business was the discussion of Dr. Woolnough’s paper on “‘A Geological Reconnaissance of the Stirling Ranges of West Australia’ recently read before the Society. In this paper the theory is put forward that the range is due to an elevation of the softer rocks composing it above the level of the surrounding hard gneissic granites and green- stones. This view was supported by Professor David, and con- tributions to the discussion were made by Mr. Somerville and Judge Docker. Monthly Meeting, Sth September, 1920. Professor David in the Chair. Five members and two visitors were present. EXHIBITS: 1. From the Mining Museum:—A collection of fulgurites. from Port Macquarie, collected by Mr. T. Dick. 2. By Professor David :—Volcanic breccia from the Old Man Valley, Hornsby, containing plant stems. 3. By Mr. W. R. Browne:—Specimens and photographs illustrating arid weathering in the Broken Hill district. PAPER: A short paper on “The Conditions of formation of Arkose deposits, and their Geological Significance,’ Mr. W. R. Browne, and was discussed by most of those present. ’ was given by XXXii. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Monthly Meeting, 13th October, 1920. Dr. C. Anderson in the Chair. Nine members and three visitors were present. EXHIBITS: From the Mining Museum:—(a) Specimens of ‘‘ Pélé’s hair’’ and of gropy lava from Kilauea; (b) pyrites from Mount Stewart Mine, Leadville. PAPER: Mr. H. C. Andrews contributed a paper on “‘The Frame- work of the Pacific,’’ emphasising its essential structural unity, while at the same time recognising the instability of the western as contrasted with the stability of the eastern portions. Instability is indicated by the varying heights to which the coral reefs have been raised in many of the coral islands of the western Pacific. The eastern portion is remarkably clear of islands, and in the case of the Hawaiian Group, at all events, the botanical evidence is against the theory of a former connection with the Mainland. The subsequent discussion was participated in by Pro- fessor Cotton, Messrs. Osborne and Browne, Father Pigot and the Chairman. Monthly Meeting, 10th November, 1920. Professor Sir Edgeworth David in the Chair. Hleven members and three visitors were present. EXHIBITS : 1. Mr. H. C. Andrews exhibited and explained a 40-chain geological map of portion of the Barrier Ranges, indicating the principal tectonic features of the region, and in par- ticular:a great fault with a horizontal displacement of about seven miles. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. XXXiil. 2. Dr. Walkom exhibited specimens of scale-leaves of Glossopteris, from the Dawson River and Stanwell, Queensland. PAPER : Professor Ootton read a paper on “‘ Polar Wanderings and their Geological Oorollaries.’’ The possibility of migrations of the terrestrial pole was denied, after inves- tigation, by physicists and mathematicians, but their calculations involved certain fundamental assumptions as to the constitution of the earth’s interior which are now known to be erroneous. A migration of the pole would have certain effects, as, for example, in regard to the zonal distribution of forms of life, etc. Discussion was postponed until the next monthly meeting. Professor Heim, of the University of Zurich, was intro- duced by the Chairman, and gave some interesting notes on the latest views as to the folding of the Swiss Alps, illustrating his remarks by diagrams sbowing the very complex nature of the overfolding. Monthly Meeting, 8th December, 1920. Professor Sir Edgeworth David in the Chair. Fourteen members and two visitors were present. EXHIBITS: 1. By Dr. Walkom:—Vertebraria from Dawson River, Queensland. 2. From Australian Museum :—Axinite with associated - epidote and (?) albite, from Bingara, collected by Mr. D. Porter. 3. From the Mining Museum :—(a) amosite, an amphibole asbestos from the Transvaal; (b) veins of chrysotile associ- ated with dolomite from the Clarence River. “XXXIV. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. 4. By Mr. W. 8. Dun:—A number of excellently pre- -served Permo-Carboniferous fossils collected by Mr. Varney Parkes from the neighbourhood of Ulladulla. | 5. By Mr. Sussmilch:—Noegerrathiopsis from Stanford Merthyr Colliery, a large specimen exhibiting a number of ~ leaves radially arranged and apparently joined on to one stem. A discussion on Professor Cotton’s note on Polar Wan- derings was initiated by Mr. EH. O. Andrews, Mr. Dun, Professor Benson, Dr. Walkom, and the Chairman also participating. A brief synopsis of Dr. H. I. Jensen’s ‘* Note on probable Late Oretaceous Glaciation in the Mount Hutton District, Queensland,’ was given by Mr. Andrews. SECTION OF AGRICULTURE. ABSTRACT OF “THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE weeliON or AGRICULTURE <> Monthly Meeting, 10th May, 1920. Sir Joseph Oarruthers in the Chair. A report was received from Mr. P. Hindmarsh, M.a., giving details of the progress of the experiments carried out on “ The Inheritance of Fecundity in Fowls.”’ _ The following officers were elected for the ensuing year: Chairman, Sir Joseph Carruthers, K.c.M.G.; Vice-Chairmen; Messrs. A. H. Stephen, H. W. Potts, and F. B. Guthrie, Hon. Sec., Mr. EK. Breakwell. Committee, Doctors R. D. Greig-Smith and 8. Dodd, Messrs. H. Cheel, EH. N. Ward, A. A. Hamilton, P. Hindmarsh, A. Spencer Watts, A. D. Ollé, and A. J. Sach. Mr. A. HE. Stephen referred to the progress of the Section during the past year, and stated that very interesting lectures on all manner of agricultural subjects had been given. Mr. Stephen also delivered an address on factors to be considered in choosing a farm, Monthly Meeting, 14th June, 1920. Mr. A. EH. Stephen in the Chair. Correspondence was received from the Commonwealth Institute of Science and Industry, through the Hon. Sec- retary of the Royal Society, intimating that action had R—December 1, 1920. XXXVIll. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. already been taken with regard to the economic nomen- clature of plants, and suggesting that a committee be formed in New South Wales to deal with marketable timbers. The following committee was appointed :— Messrs. Maiden, Baker, Ward, Cheel, A. A. Hamilton, and Hon. Secretary. Mr. EK. Breakwell exhibited various types of Sweet Sorghums displaying a considerable amount of variation in each type. The history of each variable form was traced. Mr. EK. Cheel exhibited an extremely well developed leaf of Spineless Cactus, and also the fruits of ordinary Moreton Bay Fig with their chemical analysis by Mr. A. R. Penfold. The analysis showed that the figs possessed high nutritive qualities. Sir Joseph Oarruthers delivered a lecture on the Re- organisation of Agriculture. He emphasised the fact that the farming industry in Australia had not been properly organised and had been forced to sell its products at too low a rate. He pointed out that the principal factors necessary for reorganisation were :—(a) Systematic Soil . Survey; (b) Appointment of district agricultural agents to advise farmers; (c) Co-operative Farmers’ Societies; (d) Better seed production and more specialisation in a few of the best wheats; (e) Rural Finance. An excursion to the Homebush Abattoirs took place on 24th June. Monthly Meeting, 12th July, 1920. Sir Joseph Carruthers in the Chair. Dr. 8. Dodd read an original and most instructive paper on Tick Paralysis. Dr. Dodd pointed out that the usual symptoms of tick paralysis were well known and were usually ascribed to the ‘‘ Scrub Tick.’’ There were, how- ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS, x XXI1X, ever, Several species of scrub ticks, and his investigations had fixed the identity of a certain species responsible for a particular form of paralysis. He had also established the period of incubation elapsing between the attack by the tick and the development of paralysis. He had proved that a single tick of the species Ixodes holocyclus was sufficient to set up a train of symptoms closely resembling intoxication, and often resulting in death. The popular idea that symptoms of paralysis appeared in a day or so after infestation was incorrect, as it took 5-7 days for the symptoms to manifest themselves. The question as to whether the condition was due to a living organism or virus, or to a toxin or venom, had not been determined. Monthly Meeting, 9th August, 1920. Sir Joseph Carruthers in the Chair. A discussion took place on “‘Stud Seed Production.”’ Sir Joseph Carruthers, Mr. W. Birks, and Hon. Secretary, “pointed out the valuable work done in this connection in ‘Canada, Sweden and Denmark. In both Sweden and Canada there existed Seed Companies who procured the foundation stocks of the best seed from the Agricultural Departments and extended the sowing of such seed ona large commercial scale. The New South Wales Agricultural Department had commenced to induce farmers to take up the matter -of stud-seed production. Mr. J. W. Matthews delivered a lecture on ‘‘ Wool Pro- duction.”’ He pointed out that with improved methods of breeding in 1918-19 with 25,000,000 less sheep there were 70,000,000 ibs. more wool produced than in 1891. He demonstrated that, although closer settlement should be encouraged, merino breeding which required large areas, should be safeguarded. The Border Leicester x Merino had proved the best cross for mixed-farming areas. xl. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. Monthly Meeting, 13th September, 1920. Sir Joseph Carruthers in the Chair. A conference of the principal agricultural bodies in Sydney was held to devise means for stimulating agricul- ture in this State. The Chairman, Hon. W. F. Dunn, Minister of Agriculture, Mr. A. HE. Wearne, M.L.A., and Messrs. Trethowan and Black, M.L.c., Professor Stewart and Doctors Clubb and Mary Booth spoke on the matter. It was unanimously agreed that proposals, formulated by the chairman, were necessary for the further development. of agriculture. A successful excursion was held on 25th September to the stud-farms of Sir Samuel and Mr. Anthony Hordern at. Bowral. Monthly Meeting, 11th October, 1920. Sir Joseph Oarruthers in the Chair. The Section expressed to the Chairman of the Select. Parliamentary Agricultural Commission its appreciation of the valuable investigations which were being conducted. Mr. W. H. Paine contributed a paper on Agricultural By-products and Pests, illustrated by exhibits. The lecturer pointed out that by-products of the vegetable oil industry, originally discarded, were now being widely utilised for stock food. The gluten of maize was also now in general use, although its proper application was little understood. Oat hulls, brewer’s grains, and distillery wastes should be a standard article of food. He had obtained extracts from oil seed residues, which were similar in appearance and taste to meat extracts, to which also their analyses were Closely allied. Original work had also been done in converting soup waters into stock foods. Finally Prickly Pear had been made to produce a meal which was relished ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS. xli. by poultry, although for dairy stock there would probably have to be an admixture of molasses. Monthly Meeting, 8th November, 1920. Sir Joseph Carruthers in the Chair. Mr. W. 8. Campbell delivered a lecture on the Origin of Wheat. One of the leading features of the lecture was the reference to the remarkable knowledge possessed by the Greeks and Romans concerning the selection of definite varieties for particular soils and climates. Special atten- tion was paid as far back as 370 B.C. to the testing of the strength of wheats. In Pliny’s time, 1850 years ago, the absorption test forthe strength of four was in use. Careful attention was also paid to keeping the varieties pure, even more so than at present. Hybridising wheat was first carried out in 1795-96, by Knight in Hngland. Mr. Camp- bell showed several pot-grown specimens of EKmmer, Macaroni, Federation, Marquis, and other wheats. He referred to the possibility and scope of crossing wild wheat with a native grass like Mitchell grass. Monthly Meeting, 12th December, 1920. Sir Joseph Carruthers in the Chair. Mr. A. KH. Stephen quoted results obtained by Mr. EK. Break well in co-operation with the Chilian Nitrate Com- mittee, on the fertilising of grasses with complete manure and with superphosphate and sulphate of potash, excluding nitrate of soda. In all cases, except one, a considerable increase in yield was obtained with the complete manure, sometimes over 100 per cent. The native grasses, except Andropogon sp. responded particulaily well. xlii. ABSTRACT: OF PROCEEDINGS. ~ Mr. H. Cheel showed exhibits of various kinds of Castor Oil plants. He said that the Indian variety had proved on analysis by Mr. Penfold, to be superior to Eureka, the variety usually grown in Queensland. He also discussed the possibilities of mint growing. | Mr. G. Hamblin exhibited several forms of interesting fungus diseases. Mr. A. A. Hamilton contributed a note on the acrid principles of Phytolacca and other drugs. SECTION OF INDUSTRY. ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE SECTION OF IN DUGERY. Monthly Meeting, 26th May, 1920. Mr. W. T. Willington, 0.B.E., in the Chair. Mr. Thos. McMahon gavea lecture upon “‘The Industries of the South Pacific Islands,’’ illustrated by a number of lantern slides depicting the industries and the inhabitants of the islands. Monthly Meetiny, 30th June, 1920. Mr. W. T. Willington, 0.B.£., in the Chair. Mr. A. Worsfold gave a lecture upon “‘Some War Inven- tions and their Making,” illustrated by means of diagrams and models. The following sectional Officers were elected for the current session:—Chairman, Mr. H. T. Fisk; Hon. Secre- tary, Dr. R. Greig-Smith; Committee, Messrs. A. B. Hector and W. T. Willington, 0.B.z. (Past Chairmen), J. E. Bishop, H. A. Coombs, W. W. L’Hstrange, W. Poole, B.E., B. J. Smart, B.Sc. A. EK. Stephen and H. J. Sullivan. Monthly Meeting, 21st July, 1920. Mr. EK. T. Fisk in the Chair. The Ohairman gave a lecture upon “Recent Advances in Wireless,”’ and illustrated his remarks by means of lantern slides and experimental exhibits. The structure and use of the triode valve was emphasised. Monthly Meeting, 18th August, 1920. Mr. H. T. Fisk in the Chair. Mr. A. J. Perier gave a lecture upon “* Micro-cinemato- graphy,”’ in which he described the use of the ultramicro- xlvi. ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS scope, and by means of the bioscope showed a number of films of scientific interest. . Monthly Meeting, 15th September, 1920. Mr. A. B. Hector in the Chair. | ei, Mr. 8. J. McAuliffe gave a lecture upon ‘‘Modern Coal Carbonisation,’’ illustrated by means of lantern slides. Special Meeting, Sth October, 1920. Dr. R. Greig-Smith in the Chair. Mr. A. B. Hector gave a lecture upon ‘Colour Music and its Industrial Application,’’ which he illustrated by means of diagrams and exhibits. Monthly Meeting, 20th October, 1920. Mr. H. T. Fisk in the Chair. Mr. J. C. McDowall, B.Sc., gave a lecture upon ‘‘ Brasses. and Bronzes,’’ which he illustrated by means of lantern slides and exhibits. Monthly Meetiny, 17th November, 1920. Mr. W. T. Willington, 0.B.E., in the Chair. Mr. W. van der Velden gave a lecture upon “Colour Photography, its Principles and Practice,’’ which he illustrated by means of lantern slides and by exhibits. Mr. H. J. Thompkins contributed a series of slides taken by the Paget process. Monthly Meeting, 15th December, 1920. Mr. K. T. Fisk in the Chair. Mr. R. Vicars gave an address upon “‘The Woollen ~ Industry,’’ and illustrated his remarks by means of exhibits. INDEX. PAGE Aboriginal Ceremonial Ground, Early Drawings of an 74. Abstract of Proceedings i - XXiv Agricultural Section XXXVil Geological Section xxv —xxxiv Industry Section ~— xlili- xlvi Acacia accola 149, 150, 156 alata... i .. 154 amblygona 151, 159 argentea .. 147 asparagoides 147, 151 aspera 5 ... 1Ot aulacocarpa ... LO Bancrofti 14.9 binervata 150 buxifolia 150 Chalkeri 350 conferta 150 continua sane Je crassiuscula ... 150, 151 cultriformis ... 147, 150 cyclopis of =a ee ow) dealbata a Sad cols decurrens var. mollissima .. 228 difformis ' 148, 150 diffusa ae ee 28 duratoxylon ... 231, 232 elongata elo) eacelsa 154 falcata 154 Farnesiana ... wa L46 jfimbriata 150, 151 flavescens sare OO) flearfolia 153 floribunda 148 granitica sf ... 230 Hamiltoniana 147, 150, 157 Howittir .3: 5S, bSieoor Omi Atom, Motion within the if Structure of the... i ae | Atoms, Creation of the... 8 B Box Tree from New South Wales and Queensland, On a . 163 Cc Cambaye, R. H., A new species of Queensland Ironbark ... 48 Acacia Seedlings, Part VI. 146 Early Drawings of an Abor- iginal Ceremonial Ground 74 Cheel, E., Notes on Leptospermum flavescens var. grandiflorum 2338 Correa speciosa : wa OG Cotton, L. A., The Calculation of Refractive Index in Kan- dom Sections of Minerals 177 Council’s Report “ a 25 xl viii. INDEX. PAGE PAGE Cupric Chloride on Organo- Eucalyptus microcorys a metallic Derivatives of livorer ... 209 Magnesium, The action of 37 notabilis 169, 171 Notes on a oe D occidentalis ... on 72, 73 Diphyphyllum latiseptatum 58, 60 odorata . 16s, ee Dipsacus sylvestris torsus xii _ var. Woollsiuna . 166 Oil Glands ... se ... 208 E Oils, On the manufacture of Thymol, Menthone and Ectatomma metallicum ... 151 Menthol from 40 Kinstein’s Theory of Space and oleosa.. 213, 214, Time.. -Xxill On three new species of . 66 Elements, ‘Periodic Classifica- paniculata . 5. 174 tion of 12 pellita Ee 170. 171 Endophyllum abditum 4 D0 phlebophylla .. ... 209 Essential Oils of Leptospermum pilligaensis 2) SGBS NGG flavescens var. grandiflorum piperita - 41, 209, 210, 213 and Leptospermum odoratum 197 platypus ahs, a ae Eucaluptus adjuncta 167, 168, 169 polyanthemos meas aggreguta 209, 2138, 215 polybractea fe nog 20S australiana ... 213, 214 propinqgua ATs bicolor — ’ . 166 punctata 168, 169, 171, 172, Bridgesiana ... 208 173, 174 Camsieldt 66, 68 var. grandiflora 173 canaliculata ... ve 171 pulverulenta... 212 capitellata 67. 68 radiata TT citriodora . 209 resinifera .) “a 269) coccife: a 770 robusta 209 conica --- 166 saligna 174 coriacea xiv, 69, 70, 215 siderophloia ... ie zs. 209 var.alpina... 70 Smithii 209, 211, 212 corymbosa 209, 210 Stuartiana . 228 costata . 208 tereticornis ... on 228 crebra 50 tetragona i etal Culleni _.. 48 Woollsiana ... : .. 164 De Beuzeviller 68 | Fusmatolithus Madreposttes ( fe i- dives ... Ea . 41 formis) are 56 er emophylla . a GE gigantea 71 F globulus 210, 212, 214) p. veitt, O. Ey Presidential gomphocephala ae ‘Add : i ress by ... ais PERE goniocalya 5 AU) ; ; : Financial Statement ... wide RING EDU ie Fomes lucidus XV hemaphioia 2278038, 166, 176, 209 Future of the Earth, The 23 var. microcarpa ... 166 intermedia = 209 G largiflorens mm 1G6 ; longicornis _ 215 | Glands, Nectaries or Vents ... 149 longifolia - _.. 168 | Glands, Eucalyptus Oil . 208 Luehmanniana 210 218, 215 Macarthuri ... 206, 208 iH macrorrhyncha : ... 228 | Harker, G. The Temperature of maculata 172, 175, 209 the vapour arising from maculosa . 228 boiling Saline Solutions .., 218 melliodora . 228} Housing of the Library eel xlix. PAGE INDEX, I PAGE Trodomyrmex rufonger ... . 151 | Notes on Leptospermum flarescens Ironbark, A new Queensland... Ixodes holocyclus... species of wae 48 XXX1X L Law, The Periodic oe fee ye Leptospermum breviftotinm 234, 235 buxifolium . 235 emarginatum ; ... 280 flavescens 233, 234, 235 var. grandiflorum 197, 234 grandiflorum 199, 2338; 234, 235 obovatum 234, 235 obtusum 235 odoratum 197, 199 Petersoni 234 virgatum is. : ; _ 233 Library, Housing of the ix Lithostrotion arundineum ot columnare 62 floriforme OO irregulare 58, 60 marginatum ... 56 martina 60 oblongum 56 stanvellense ... ol striatum 56 IM Magnesium, The Action of Cupric Chloride on Organo- metallic Derivatives of 37 Maiden, J. H., Angophora Cle- landi.. lo Descriptions of three new species of Eucalyptus 66 Notes on Eucalyptus, No. IX 167 Notes on Two Acacias... 227 On a Box-Tree from New South Wales and Seo land . 163 Members, List of (ix) Mentha prperita ... 41 Minerals, The Calculation of Refractive Index in Random Sections of ... Weir Moreton Bay 74 N National Research Council, Australian ... E Kore oO Nature, The iariformitios Ore 1 The Laws of a Vi Nomenclature of Plants cath |: var. grandiflorum ... . 233 O Obituary .. 28 — 36 Orisnastraea ensifer ie ae 4 Osborne, G. D., The Volcanic Neck at the Basin, aa River 1 EES Oxley, John 74: P Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress xviii Peart, Mary M., The Calculation of Refractive Index in Ran- dom Sections of Minerals Penfold, A. R.,On the Manufac- ture of Thymol, Menthone and Menthol, from Euca- lyptus Oils ... The Essential Oils of Lep- tospermum flavescens var. grandiflorum and Bees mum odoratum : Phosphorescent Display Piperitone Platanus orientalis: Pollock, J. A., The Stethoscope, witha reference to a func- tion of the Auricle.. : Presidential Address by Charles Edward Fawsitt ... Prince of Wales, Address to the * Ranges of Western Australia, A Geological Reconnaissance of the “Stirling x Refractive Index in ander Sections of Minerals, The Calculation of as Regularities observed on Com: “position Ss Smith, H. G., On the Manufac- ture of Thymol], Menthone and Menthol from Euca- lyptus Oils ... Stanley, On Aphrophyllum Hallense and Lithostrotion from the Neighbourhood of Bingara, N.S. Wales Stethoscope, witha reference to a function of the Auricle, Thea. 177 “40 40 INDEX. PAGE ; om Stipules bats we ... 156 | Vapour arising from Stirling Range Series: Age of tke 103 saline solutions, ‘Th perature of... - .. T Vitality of Seeds in Sea Temperature of the vapour aris- velguaie Neck at the Ba ing fiom boiling saline © soluticns, The af cache 1S W Transport of Seeds by Water... 146 | Welch, M. B., Eucalyptus Tripinnate Leaves . 147 Glands Ks Turner, E. E., The Action of Woolnough, W. G.,A Geol Cupric Chloride on Organo- Reconnaissance of the metallic Derivatives of ing Ranges of Magnesium ... pe Lnheoe Australia... Twin Stems _... a Ag Spdnep : F., W. Wuitt, PRINTER, 344 KENT STREET. 1921. ‘Issued Webraary. 21st, 1921. as Oil Glands. By M. B. Waxes, B.Sc. “197 bow 208. By JH: eek, 1.8. On i F. R. "Bk a foteg on two Acacias. : oo February 28th, 1921. eee ey i —Xxiv. XXV. — XXXiV- ... XXXV.—Xlil. xlili. — xlvi. (i. = vi.) sae, (WIR) a ho Gee pox Manama, ae ) i #0,Vouunn 1 LIV... .. Xlvii. Ane TTT TTT TE LAR} TAPHINTOODRARY pAel bin oui” Aa an ThA TTL Lhd tlle sn aD. idaas, AAR . Nh Baganvnal ah NYT ide A- ie, Worry Wy wena ila. SS A Sagas 7 alae ane aeAbee " ans Pang, ‘ a Neangtta ani ‘ ite nl AnPRacBeas aon4 nie A, a6 . ; » . ~e ba | WLS TT ana HL TTT Try eget cme meee AO Napehe dh | iy, hae 2 al aT tr ie . é By “ay va (7 & im a i ts SOT ante, Pee ste| || err TAAL TEARS Pe CA ADD tt se gte rae tthy ARR T Wiese I MINE NLU a eli PPL Raina ARG Dy Sheen CORaant a, A tae” Saasasanaataaann alla! Saar Mt, A. Mensa. 4 Aa, UAsa. Aleta ss GAMER ORI IAS POTTY Pye iron é wy» | wilt Nua a cra | tar s\n Liem ant qv~* - gibnensatth, a- asf } ay tae 4 ne Be seaael. ih ath mange)? ALL aff lantern ALY Ya vue ian PR a oang: r¢ < anda wah ki ‘ma a LE Lar) de s* “4a es Aa Yi rienla e! hy ii aap Neate, fing, Bl LLY Aa igen aA - iy fi A-Aang ar eae de Wag @ Dor land ST UTLTLL eee bey LAN pone 4 a lone) ite e CpRRE MEG ae af MAINTE Ase a Apa j Ay = a Pian ie \¥ a rere Ratan, a ee eal ap Ww a = rf q ign eneteniaditien | RaNNanen> ; fees % het ed Py Ae Re, Bsa Ae ay ee Te | PPA dda aT a s/\p Mee \Sa-- noth @&Gena.e arta Portesoase [Aaa Aaa, [ \ 111 Tey Tomas CO MCb oe naa: it ee pee UN i eOaManee Fm PN ale alae 1 ansaatte =k ot YN TY reeves nana rR. “ aa a woe ire ap FAN - -*! @Qhanpaha LEE eS , Sar woe I vi LLY \ ~ hy a a - 2 A AD em asaass SAAB AAAIM gone aa? Mee A ae y ey SeoeRea » Ve — a | lh | | Me Tay 2 i . Ra 1444" soaggplibaneabn this aaarraunss YT YY ear aa Tie ica } jo kog eS | ott ay: ae aah Aaa & 3 | been DARRCE ARR TT Nie Sn ng aA Aa A. I “4 in Wh Y1T) An ry ft=e> “Ala aye pont or Dire teeewae Lenni bbhht tau yas a, @- NAKA ik ’ p Aas rT \m An AN Thee sek | OS a iy ® ES Sida adalat ohn +o. a HHH pana” ieegaNlirala 1 Ot ‘ aat* PF ,. ,” g eXASRane® | OR aa ee er er yar SryF aly Ty 4 nit Pert ay . aft yaa? hate ee tl} AnoAar ananassae moe AL fee Hen er ARE > fr ~ r - rl | m 2 ; | i a tlalal aled HPAL eee "1 ya, iF ‘\. (NA! Aan a Aa A oY MO fs se aA ‘ANA Sy aor | | 7 Sianemahe. 4 A mm rnin 2 AMA npane, .-- py paar sane WINN, I "a tan tes '-* wena nan abttenie: a SA ST Raa,, I ae vA DA NA» A 4 , mm 2 ral ~ s “_ : Pd tole yer A” 0 erry rr i a... ana PR ng | an : grag hy ‘Te, SEALE ory. gf ik" eergetn) ase £ hel Per Pe ARa: a OGe ~ a ; abr a An A ‘“.. _—— Pa : AN v& oo pment nay? = oo, eS a mm . «2 oP Lan a. A be s Mh , ’ Pass \& ll ri o—$—$') aa el Lid ar~ x 7 Se ee eg = 3 No er ’ raul hall = Ls he A A - ———— \@2 a. if ~ Ty aa ik : T a &. Qe a ' awl” va) mys i ‘a4 wit A rT papha’ ala Y. pgeieii neal & — Napa Pree wr a tw AR PS Yt ry ei ttl Lia LC te — + \s 4 wr Se ele e eannheem, & — SARs at: @ THIN 1 als r Aina ty Ff ge are art 5 === © Peay elt eh eet Melisa ery at ae ida AAR 58 go5 a eae ) 2— Tide { ; ~ Pe ong Aiaeag ry j—==——=§ : “oe : beacal Pep “aan ry Ram ‘= Rae > 5 + PP pe x Dame . ae ; ba sec RaQ am 5 (RA RP RA ey ae Pwr \ rh yy" > BIN ae wen Seat Qe “Ae _ Oe yp HBOAAARMLDMANS taut an te<@ "2" marae i | ba Pi armaRQaar an Aina JOA Xan | AeA . Thu ‘get sas aaanaase a Ay : v eel MA AR” se aatane ann. wane ae’ a ‘aya. ¥ Ps ; a 9) i pndins aa ‘mi TYPMEYAT norms Tt la ¢ ae a. sar Fe 2 Ng yiaAnac is. avy \VZA Saas rt Mae SO Wigaa | Ze